Home

1404-UM001C-EN-P, Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 User Manual

1. CSP File No N33 Remote 0 BT 14 CIP Assy Inst 39 Write 40 Read No of Elements 9 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type See table Applies to Table A 34 All models Table A 35 Table A 36 Table A 37 Table A 38 M6 amp M8 Table A 48 Table A 49 M8 only Element M4 M M Element name Range Default Comment No M5 6 8 Value 0 e e e Password Oto 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 e e Channel 1 to 9 1 Refer to Configuring Harmonic Analysis on page 2 e e Read back mode 0 to 1 0 8 10 3 Reserved 0 0 e e Individual harmonic datatype Oto 1 0 4 Reserved 0 0 e e Enable disable Harmonics 0 to1 1 5 Reserved 0 0 e e EEE 519 Max I Integer 0to 9999 0 6 Reserved 0 0 e o IEEE 519 Max I Exponent 4 to 21 0 7 e Reserved 0 0 e o IEEE 519 Max lmnqinteger Oto 9999 0 8 e Reserved 0 0 e je IEEE 519 Max lamag Exponent 4to 21 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 43 CSP File No F34 Remote 1 0 BT 23 CIP Assy Inst 41 No of Elements 9 M4 M5 10 M6 M8 User Configurable No Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 8
2. Capture Sampling Data Samples per Total Cycles per Capture Data Reads Required Type Rate Resolution ra at 60 50 ey at 60 50 H DeviceNet Other Comms 0 5 4 kHz 13 bit 90 108 51 1 42 6 0 85 230 92 1 2 7 kHz ign 45 54 102 2 85 2 1 70 2 1 35 kHz 22 5 27 204 4 170 3 3 40 3 5 4 kHz 7 bit 90 108 102 2 85 2 1 70 460 184 4 2 7 kHz wsio 45 54 2044 170 3 3 40 5 1 35 kHz 22 5 27 408 8 340 7 6 81 Read Back Mode The data client uses the indexed read method to read oscillogram capture data The readback mode options are e Auto increment all channels successive reads of Table A 40 increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel increment through all remaining channels and wrap back to the original channel Auto increment current channel successive reads of the results table will increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel only e Manual increment each write of Table A 39 specifies the channel and block to be read in the next read of Table A 40 Successive reads of the results table will return the same block of data each time if no read back select write is done Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 4 Advanced Features Reading Oscillograph Data Read oscillograph data from Table A 40 Oscillograph Results using the indexed read method This read only table comprises 29 DeviceNet or 59 all other communications options integer elements e C
3. Table A 50 Event Log Text CSP File No N50 Remote 0 BT 37 CIP Assy Inst 62 Write 63 Read No of Elements 22 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Write type 0 to 1 Refer to Event Log User Comment Field M8 only on page 7 6 2 Dnet unique write identifier 32768 to 32767 0 3 Text block 1 to2 1 4 Event record Internal identifier 1 to 32767 5 User entered timestamp Year 1998 to 2097 On a write enter timestamp of user entered new event see 6 Month day 0101 to 1231 page 4 18 7 RE 0000 t0 2359 On a read return 0 8 0000 to 5999 9 Reserved 0 0 10 Text character pair 1 0 to 32382 11 Text character pair 2 12 Text character pair 3 13 Text character pair 4 14 Text character pair 5 15 Text character pair 6 16 Text character pair 7 17 Text character pair 8 18 Text character pair 9 19 Text character pair 10 20 Text character pair 1 1 21 Text character pair 12 22 Text character pair 13 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 62 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 51 Catalog Number and WIN CSP File No N51 Remote 0 BT 50 CIP Assy Inst 64 No of Elements 29 User Configurabl
4. The Powermonitor 3000 is equipped with six 2 color light emitting diodes LEDs arranged as shown in Figure 2 2 Functions of the LEDs differ among the various communications configurations The three LED s on the left display the same information on Powermonitor 3000 modules with any communication option including native RS 485 communications only The three LED s on the right have different labels and different indications depending on the communications option selected as shown in the chart below Table 2 2 LED Indicators All Powermonitor 3000 Models LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition Module Status Off Control power is off or insufficient Steady Red Major fault internal self test has failed If a power cycle does not correct the problem call customer support Steady Green Powermonitor 3000 is operating normally RS 485 RX Off The RS 485 bus is idle no active data is present Flashing Green Active data is present on the RS 485 bus RS 485 TX Off Powermonitor 3000 is not transmitting data onto the RS 485 bus Flashing Green Powermonitor 3000 is transmitting data onto the RS 485 bus Table 2 3 Native RS 485 Communications only catalog numbers ending in 000 LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition F1 Off Not Used F2 Off Not Used F3 Off Not Used Product Description 2 11 Table 2 4 RS 232 Optional Communications catalog numbe
5. msgGetStatus ER CTU a Count Up CU Counter Counter CDN gt Preset 2 Accum 0 EQU NEQ Equal Not Equal Source A Status 0 Source A Status 1 30 1 Source B 30 Source B 1 msgGetStatus DN IE JE Counter1 DN at JE Be msgWriteNew ER AE IE Failed msgGetStatus DN Failed Success WE Sa Start Counter1 Faile JE ID RES Success The message configuration for the GetStatus message is shown below Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 32 Sample Applications Message Configuration msgGetStatus x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type PLCS Typed Read X Source Element N32 0 Number Of Elements 2 Destination Tag Status 0 x New Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 2 Error Code I Timed Out Extended Error Code Cancel for He Communicating witha The ae aia and sear pd sae eee team tested the following example ladder The scan times for execution o SLC5 05 1 141 L552 the ladder are as follows Controller and ControlNet Scanner 1747 SCNR Unscheduled Messaging Table C 3 Scan Times Operation Scan Time Table reads for Integer and float files 20 ms Table writes of Integer and float files 30 ms All the communication operations of the ladder are locked out until the read or write bits are set This was done
6. 3 Enable disable logging status input changes 0 to 1 0 4 events in the event log 1 to 50 M4 M5 1 to 100 M6 M8 5 Enable disable logging of time date 0 to 1 1 set Refer to Configuring the Event Log Using Communications on page 7 4 Table A 27 Event Log Results CSP File No N29 Remote 1 0 BT 21 CIP Assy Inst 34 No of Elements 14 17 or 18 see table User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type See table Element M4 No M5 6 0 e e M Element name Range e Reserved 0 Comment Returns 0 1 e e e Internal identifier 0 to 32768 Refer to Reading Data from the Event Log Using Communications on page 7 5 e Timestamp of event Year 1998 to 2097 Refer to Expressing Data in Data Tables on Month day 0101 to 1231 page 4 18 Hour minute 7 Second hsec 0000 to 2359 0000 to 5999 ojl Aal e Co N e e e Event type 0 to 19 Refer to Table A 29 List of Event Types Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 37 Element M4 M M Element name Range Comment No M5 6 7 e e e Event code Refer to Reading Data from the Event Log 8 e le e Setpoint type 0 to 52 Using Communications on page 7 5 9 e e Setpoint evaluat
7. Master Module Bulletin Number Type of Device Current Inputs Communications Revenue E 05 5 Amps Options Accuracy Class Peete M4 Master Module with 3 phase 4 i N none Class 1 M4 onitoring an metering pulse input conversion 000 None a i Management Products tpoints VO and data loggi 232 RS 232 Serial Class 0 5 M5 M6 M8 SPRON S r AnG gata Oggng Power Supply Devi 02 Class 0 2 M5 M6 M8 M5 M4 functionality firmware DNT DeviceNet as ee upgradeable to an M6 or M8 A 120V 240V ac RIO Remote 1 0 M6 M4 functionality plus 50 60 Hz or ENT Ethernet oscillography sag swell detection 125V 250V de CNT ControlNet harmonics 1 to 41 measurement B 24V de additional setpoints and logging firmware upgradeable to M8 M8 M6 functionality plus transient capture and analysis harmonics measurement up to 63rd transducer and energy meter modes 1 In addition to Native DF1 via RS 485 port Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 B 2 Catalog Number Explanation Display Module 1404 DM Bulletin Number Type of Device 1404 Power Monitoring and DM Display Module Management Products with 3 Meter Cable Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Appendix C Sample Applications Introduction This Appendix contains sample applications including ladder diagrams to help you get started in setting up communications between your application and a P
8. Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 56 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 46 Transient Capture Results CSP File No N46 Remote 1 0 BT 60 CIP Assy Inst 57 No of Elements 29 DeviceNet only 59 All other communications types User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Timestamp Month day 0000to 1231 Capture trigger timestamp see page 4 18 1 Hour minute 0000 to 2359 2 Second hsec Sagot 5999 3 Capture 1to6 Refer to Reading Transient Capture Data on page 8 22 4 Channel number 1 to7 5 Block number See page 8 23 6 Reserved 0 7 Unique Transient Capture ID 0 to 30000 8 Reserved 0 9 Data Point 1 8192 to 8191 0 Data Point 2 1 Data Point 3 12 Data Point 4 13 Data Point 5 14 Data Point 6 15 Data Point 7 6 Data Point 8 7 Data Point 9 18 Data Point 10 19 Data Point 11 20 Data Point 12 21 Data Point 13 22 Data Point 14 23 Data Point 15 24 Data Point 16 25 Data Point 17 26 Data Point 18 27 Data Point 19 28 Data Point 20 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Element Element name No 29 Data Point 21 30 Data Point 22 31 Data Point 23 32 Data Point 24 33 Data Point 25 34 Data Point 26 35 D
9. e je Form C ANSI C37 90 1989 rated relay for direct breaker tripping e je e Time stamped data logging of system measurements and events e je Configurable trend log up to 45 000 records deep e e je je Event log 50 records deep e je Firmware upgrades without removing module Total harmonic distortion THD and Crest Factor Automatic network based time synchronization via SNTP for Ethernet Series B ANSI C12 20 Class 0 5 revenue metering accuracy EN60687 Class 0 5 revenue metering accuracy e je Canadian Revenue Meter specification accuracy e o Field upgradeable to M6 or M8 extra cost option 10 additional setpoints with more options Event Log an additional 50 records deep User configurable oscillography up to 400 cycles 60 Hz TIF K factor and IEEE 519 Pass Fail Sag and swell detection with oscillogram capture Load factor log 12 records months deep Calculates amplitude and distortion for harmonics 1 to 41 Calculates amplitude and distortion for harmonics 1 to 63 Sub cycle transient capture and metering Event Log with user comment entry e Transducer and Energy Meter modes with improved update rate 1 Class 0 2 revenue metering accuracy available as an extra cost option Communications Options Product Descr
10. Dielectric Withstand Control Power 2000 Volts Voltage Inputs 2000 Volts Current Inputs 2000 Volts Status Inputs 500 Volts Control Relays 1600 Volts Terminal Blocks Power Supply and Voltage input 12 AWG 4 mm2 max Terminals 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm Torque 75 C or Higher Copper Wire only Relay KYZ outputs Current input 4 AWG 2 5 mm2 max 10 4 Ib in 1 18 Nm Torque terminals 75 C or Higher Copper Wire only Status inputs RS485 14 AWG 2 5 mm2 max 5 Ib in 0 56 Nm Torque RIO DNT When present 14 AWG 2 5 mm2 max 5 Ib in 0 56 Nm Torque Operating Temperature 20 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Cat No 1404 DM 1404 Mxxxx 000 1404 Mxxxx DNT 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F 1404 Mxxxx 232 RIO ENT CNT Storage Temperature 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Humidity 5 to 95 Noncondensing Vibration 10 to 500 Hz 2G Operational 0 012 in Shock 1 2 Sine Pulse 11 ms duration 30G Operational and 30G Nonoperational 1 Recommended Ring lug AMP part 320634 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 D 6 Technical Specifications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions Q Can I program the power monitor through the display A Yes All programmable attributes can be accessed and programmed through the display module Q Do I need a display module A All features of the monitor can be accessed and programmed through the communication port s
11. Password required for Clear command use 1 for read back selections e DeviceNet unique write identifier Capture number selects one of 6 captures or returns the last capture number selected Range 0 most recent capture initiated via communications 1 through 6 capture 1 through 6 default 1 e Channel number selects a channel number or returns the last channel number selected Range 1 V1 2 11 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 I 7 I4 default 1 e Block number selects a data block for the next read or returns the last block selected Range depends on communications type See below Default 1 e Read back mode selects a read back mode or returns the last mode selected Range 0 to 2 default 0 See below e Clear command clears one or all captures Always returns 0 See below e Reserved elements must be zero 0 on a write returns 0 Advanced Features 8 23 Capture clear status Read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers are clear Bit 0 LSB corresponds to capture 1 bit 1 to capture 2 and so on For each bit 1 indicates clear 0 indicates not clear Capture ready status read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers contain captures that are ready to read Same bit correspondence as above For each bit 1 indicates the capture is ready 0 indicates no capture or not yet ready Block Number The block number and the total number of data reads required to read a
12. 0 Voltage THD and Crest Factor Voltage are omitted for neutral channel 2 Parameters displayed depend on the wiring mode 3 Individual phase parameters are omitted in delta wiring modes 4 Load factor parameters are available only on M6 and M8 modules Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Configuration Menu Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 15 5 In Program Mode this entry becomes Clear Accumulated Time 6 1 10 M4 M5 or 1 20 M6 M8 7 Available on M6 and M8 only 8 Applies to EtherNet IP Series B ControlNet DeviceNet and Remote 1 0 only Level 3 P ae Basi anced Native Optional Setpoint Min Max Event Comm Comm 1 n Log Log Wiring Mode i e e Depends on Eral en Bee ea Log Stans PT Primary ng Delay communications fa uanon Min Max Log Input Changes Of Demand Periods Baud High Limit PT Secondary options it CT Prima Forced Demand Delay Address see Chapter 4 Low Limit y Projected Demand Type Format P Pickup Del CT Secondary KYZ Control Source Dropout Del 14 Primary KYZ Pulse Scale Output Action 14 Secondary KYZ Pulse Width Accumu Time Nominal Sys Voltage Relay Control Source Status Relay Pulse Scale Relay Pulse Width
13. Sample Applications Ladder diagram Read_clock_from_PM3K MSG J E Type CIP Generic CEN Message Control Read_Time CDN gt lt ER 5 Read_Time DN Read_clock_from_PM3K J E gt Read_Time ER Set_clock_from_PM3K MSG J E Type CIP Generic CEN gt Message Control Set_Time CDND CER gt Set_Time DN Set_clock_from_PM3K 1 6 gt Set_Time ER Message Setup Dialogs This is the Read message dialog Message Configuration Read_Time x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Get Attribute Single x Type ie me oe Ce a E UTE ry Class p Hex Destination Date_time_from_PM lt 7 Instance 7 Attribute 3 Hex er O Enable Enable Waiting O Start Done Done Length 16 Error Code Extended Error Code T Timed Out Error Path Error Text Cancel Apply Help Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 11 The communications tab of the message setup simply shows the module name in the I O configuration for this example Message Configuration Read_Time Lomimunication Metian i Se Une iene E Destination Linke 7 4 Source LIT Destination WGue od ictal Vv ache bonnectons EF fir real Destination mo p Note that the source length is in Bytes not elements S
14. element 8 Only the following elements are needed during a record selection write Password 1 DeviceNet unique write identifier as applicable Reserved words must be 0 e Read back mode see above Min Max Log Data Logging 7 13 Table A 22 Trend Log Results is a read only table of 14 DeviceNet or 22 all other communications options floating point elements as follows e Reserved element returns 0 e Internal identifier increments by 1 to 15 for each trend log record then rolls over to 0 e Time stamp in 4 element timestamp format See page 3 28 User selected parameters parameters you selected when you configured the Trend Log The Min max Log maintains a time stamped record of the minimum and maximum values of up to 74 metering parameters You can monitor values over a day a week a month or any period to record the highest and lowest values of voltage current power factor etc Most industrial utility bills include a charge based on the maximum demand recorded during the billing period You could use the Min max log to provide that piece of data for generating an internal or shadow billing report Accessing the Min Max Log Using the Display Module To view log entries navigate through these menus DISP gt LOGS gt MIN MAX LOG The first log record title will appear M M LOG AMPS L1 Press the Enter key and the record data will scroll across the display MIN 4 MM DD YYYY hhimm MAX
15. 20 e je je Table A 52 Configuration Controller Command W N53 67 1 EER S Table A 53 1 Data is most commonly read from this table using the Indexed read method Refer to Indexed reads of large data 2 Powermonitor 3000 starts with file 9 to avoid any data type incompatibility with SLC file numbers 1 through 8 which are of a fixed data type 3 Remote I O tables and the default DeviceNet input channel are PLC SLC compatible but if the user reconfigures the DeviceNet input channel Instance 1 it may or may not be PLC SLC compatible depending on the number of parameters configured 4 The I O table is user configurable for DeviceNet and EtherNet IP only Instance 1 5 Basic device configuration data table size is 8 elements for the M4 and M5 and 9 elements for the M6 and M8 6 This is a reply to a PCCC diagnostic status request used by RSWho to display text and an icon for the product 7 The size of the Trend log results table is 28 elements for DeviceNet and 44 elements for all other communication protocols 8 The size of the Event log results table is 14 elements for M4 M5 17 elements for M6 and 18 elements for the M8 9 The User configured table results table is populated from the bottom up with the number of parameters the user has configured The DeviceNet table must contain 14 elements or less to remain PLC SLC compatible 10 Harmonic results THD crest factor and more data table size is 18 elements for the M4 and M5 and 20 elem
16. 90 Ethernet Series B 26 Accuracy Class 0 to2 Indicates revenue metering accuracy class as manufactured refer to page 3 3 0 Class 1 1 Class 0 5 2 Class 0 2 This is not truly a data table but a reply to a PCCC diagnostic status request used by RSWho to display P gt text and an icon for the Powermonitor 3000 Table A 17 DF1 PCCC Diagnostic Status Reply Byte Bits Contents Description 1 0 1 Mode status Unused 2 3 4 7 2 0 7 Type extender EE 3 0 7 Extended interface type 36h DF1 half duplex slave via native RS485 port or RS 232 port 65h Ethernet 4 0 7 Extended processor type 8Ah 1404 Powermonitor 3000 products 5 0 4 Series revision Unused 5 7 6 16 All Catalog number Catalog number written into the device at time of production or calibration in ASCII For example 1404 M4 05 A RI0 17 24 All Product Specific Unused Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 25 CSP File No N23 Remote 1 0 BT 22 CIP Assy Inst 24 Write 25 Read No of Elements 16 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1
17. A Unlike the other Allen Bradley power monitors the Powermonitor 3000 ships with a non interchangeable communications network card Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Glossary ampere A unit of electrical current or rate of flow of electrons One volt across one ohm of resistance causes a current flow of one ampere A flow of one coulomb per second equals one amp apparent power The product of voltage magnitude and current magnitude in a circuit Units are VA or some multiple thereof balanced load An alternating current power system consisting of more than two current carrying conductors in which these current carrying conductors all carry the same current billing demand The demand level that a utility uses to calculate the demand charges on the current month s bill Various methods may be used to determine the value such as minimum demand peak demand or a ratchet clause It can be based on Watt Demand VA Demand VAR Demand or some combination of these A rate at which a transmission occurs where one baud equals one bit per second burden The electrical load placed on source of VA or the load an instrument or meter places on a current or potential transformer All current and potential transformers have a rated burden which should not be exceeded or else transformer transformation accuracy deteriorates capacitor A device consisting essentially of two conducting surfaces separated by an insula
18. April 2003 7 10 Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Examples Example 1 A user wants to log kW every 15 minutes and wants to know how many records the log will contain and how long a time that will cover The first formula applies _ 7 0 65524 1 4 6 D Fill and hold mode allows logging the most records Logging only 1 parameter per record the formula results in a total of 45 866 records after rounding down Logging every 15 minutes this log configuration will log 15 8 months of kW data Example 2 Another user wants to log several parameters every 5 minutes indefinitely retrieving the records within one week after the end of each month He will save the retrieved data and create trend graphs on his PC The question is how many parameters may be monitored The second formula applies to this example _ 7 1 16381 10944 P 1 5 The total log depth of 10 944 is based on the log duration and interval 31 days per month 7 days 24 hours per day 60 minutes per hour 5 minute logging interval Overwrite mode F 1 allows you to read the log any time without losing any data In this example P the number of parameters that may be recorded is 7 rounded down from 7 48 From this example you can see that the trend log can log 7 parameters every 5 minutes in a 38 day sliding window Data Logging 7 11 Setting up the Trend Log You configure the Trend Log by performing a tab
19. Decimal INT 2 e My_PM3000 0 Data O o Decimal INT My_PM3000 0 Data 1 0 Decimal INT Powermonitor 3000 Web Access You may view a number of data tables by simply pointing your web browser to the IP address of your Powermonitor 3000 from a computer with access to the unit s subnet Example http 192 1 1 207 On the left side of the web page is a list of data table that you may view Each list entry is a hyperlink that takes you to the selected table with a single mouse click Each table appears as a tabular display with value descriptions and values To return to the main page click the Refresh button on your browser The Series B Powermonitor 3000 web page may be configured Contact Rockwell Automation for more information Communications 4 43 Figure 4 14 Powermonitor 3000 Web Page Rockwell Automation Ethernet Address Voltage Cumert amp Frequency ASA Serial Bowes Factor IP Address Powermonitor 3000 00 00 BC 08 0B 9B 20039964 130 151 70 17 255 25500 Not Set 2 POWER amp ENERGY Mavegement Seretions 123 orn Enet Application FRN 103 Enet Boot Code FRN 1 04 Additional Ethernet Information The Powermonitor 3000 utilizes the following fixed Ethernet port numbers e HTML Port 80 e CSP Port 2222 e CIP Port 44818 For More Information For related documentation on Ethernet and EtherNet IP communications please see the following intern
20. Download the revised program to the controller Run RSNetworx for ControlNet to schedule the connection between the controller and the Powermonitor 3000 Refer to the RSNetworx for ControlNet documentation for assistance The ControlNet Powermonitor 3000 supports up to 64 concurrent Class 1 connections to instance 1 and one concurrent connection to instance 2 Communicating to a Powermonitor 3000 from a SLC through 1747 KFC15 Controlnet Connect the 1747 KFC15 according to your instruction manual documentation There should be a connection from KFC15 RS232 port to Channel 0 of the SLC For this example the communications and configuration of the channel 0 and the KFC15 were the following e KFC15 DF1 station address 7 e KFC15 and SLC baud rate at 19200 e KFC15 and SLC Full duplex e KFC15 and SLC Parity None e KFC15 and SLC Handshaking None e KFC15 Diagnostic Command Execution Disabled e KFC15 Duplicate detect Off e KFC15 and SLC Error Detect CRC KFC15 Number of Retries 3 e KFC15 DF1 ACK Time Out 3 2 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 46 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Since it is easier to configure and much faster to run full duplex mode is the preferred mode of operation Use half duplex mode only if you do not have a gt choice Reading files from the Powermonitor 3000 Both integer and float files can be read fr
21. none Handshaking control 1 RTS CTS Optional Remote 1 0 Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in RIO are equipped with an optional Remote I O port in addition to the native port This dual port option allows the use of both ports simultaneously The port emulates a logical quarter rack of I O You must configure the rack address group number baud rate and last rack status Configuration parameters are RIO Rack Address The logical rack address as configured in the Remote I O scanner module Range 0 to 63 decimal default 1 e RIO Group Number Logical group number corresponding to the Remote I O port quarter rack Range 0 2 4 or 6 default 0 RIO Last Rack If you are using a PLC 2 based system set this flag for the highest numbered rack group addressed device on the channel Range 0 or 1 default 0 Communications 4 5 RIO Baud Rate Sets the communications rate Range 57 6 115 or 230 Kbaud default 57 6 All devices on the channel must be set to the same baud rate For a logical rack address of 63 decimal do not use group number 2 4 or 6 Powermonitor 3000 logical be rack addresses are expressed in decimal You may need to convert addresses to octal range 0 to 77 for some PLC applications Use the Display Module under the PROGRAM gt OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS menu to set or modify Remote I O communications parameters Table 4 3 Optional Remote 1 0 Port Config
22. 0 performs no action 1 clears the accumulated time for selected setpoint Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 12 Setpoint Programming and Operation Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Reading Setpoint Status Data Using Communications To read the setpoint status using communications the client uses the indexed read method The Powermonitor 3000 uses Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status both to select the setpoint to be read on the next read and to return the status of the selected setpoint In auto increment mode 0 the first read returns the status of setpoint 1 the second read setpoint 2 and so on In manual mode 1 the client alternates writes selecting the desired setpoint with reads of the setpoint status See the list just above for the content of this data table Relay and KYZ Output Operations Chapter 6 I O Operations The Powermonitor 3000 is equipped with two relay outputs and two status inputs designed to provide a discrete interface with your application The Relay output is an electromechanical Form C relay with contacts rated at 10 amperes at 240 VAC or 250 VDC This set of contacts is also rated to meet IEEE C37 90 requirements for power circuit breaker tripping duty The KYZ output is a solid state relay rated at 80 mA at 240 VAC or 250 VDC that provides higher reliability and long life for low power signaling duty such as a kWh pulse output The two outputs operate inde
23. 3 9600 baud 4 19200 baud 5 RS 232 address 1 to 254 1 Identifies the device on the link 0 is typically used by the DF1 master 255 is the broadcast address 6 Data format 0 to2 0 Parity number of data bits number of stop bits 0 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 1 Even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 7 Flow Control Oto 1 0 Data flow control for RS 232 RS 485 port Handshaking 0 None 1 Hardware RTS CTS 8 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 The default address is the same as the Device ID which is assigned at the factory and can be found printed on the white label on the side of the master module The device ID is incremented for each device Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 16 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 9 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result CSP File No F15 Remote 1 0 BT 38 CIP Assy Inst 14 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Units Range Comment No 0 L1 Current Amps A 0 0 to 999 9x102 Refer to Voltage Current and Frequency Results on page 1 L2 Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 ss 2 L3 Current 0 0 to 999 9x10 3 Avg Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 4 L1 N Voltage Vol
24. Comment No Value 2 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change the date amp time Returns 1 1 Date year 1998 to 1998 1 January 2 February 12 December 2097 The internal clock adjusts the date for leap year 2 Date month 1to12 1 3 Date day 1to 31 11 4 Time hour 0 to 23 0 0 12am 1 1am 23 11pm 5 Time minute 0 to 59 0 The internal clock does not adjust for daylight savings time 6 Time seconds 0 to 59 0 7 Time hundredths of seconds 0 to 99 0 1 On awrite the maximum value for day depends on the values written to month and the year 2 The data and time default values are set if one of the following three conditions occur When the device is first powered up at the factory A device power up following the depletion of the real time clock power source In the event of an abnormal condition which may cause the real time clock to contain values which are not in the valid range The date and time are not set to the default values when Restore Factory Defaults is performed via the Display Module or communications port Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 6 Advanced Device Configuration Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 9 CSP File No N12 Remote 1 0 BT 26 CIP Assy Inst 8 Write 9 Read No of Elements 25 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data
25. Ethernet Communications Option The Powermonitor 3000 with optional Ethernet communications operates as a slave device on the Ethernet network Its built in web server provides access to metering and status data using only your web browser The Ethernet port supports up to 64 concurrent connections It employs an algorithm to release inactive connections after a user configurable time Ethernet communications functionality differs significantly from Series A to Series B Table 4 9 summarizes the differences IMPORTANT Please give particular attention to the messaging and software version compatibility information in the table If you are replacing a Series A Ethernet Powermonitor 3000 with a Series B unit you may need to upgrade software or modify the communications programming of your controller ladder programming or client application to re establish communications Table 4 9 Series A and Series B Comparison Function Series A Comms FRN Series B 2 01 or 2 02 Communications protocol CSP PCCC and or EtherNet IP only EtherNet IP Protocol select Yes N A Bootp support Yes No Data rate 10 Mbps 10 100 Mbps Web page Fixed web page Configurable web page Flash upgradeable Uses special loader Uses ControlFlash LED indicators Link RX TX LNK ACT STATUS Network Demand Synch No Yes SNTP capable No Yes 1 0 Communications No Yes CIP Generic messaging Yes Yes PLC 5 Typed CIP messaging Yes Yes CIP
26. MM DD YYYY hhimm Pressing any key will return to the record title display then you may press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys to select the next record you wish to view Refer to Table 7 3 for a complete list of Min max log parameters Configuration You may choose to enable or disable the Min max log using the Display Module by navigating these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt MIN MAX LOG and selecting ON or OFF using the arrow keys and the Enter key You may also make this selection using communications Clearing the Log You may clear the Min max log using the Display Module by navigating these menus PROG gt PASS gt COMMANDS gt MIN MAX LOG CLEAR Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key until Yes appears then press the Enter key You may also clear the Min max Log using communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 14 Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Interfacing with the Min Max Log Using Communications Write Min max Log configuration settings and command using a table write to Table A 23 Min Max Log Configuration Read Back Select Access data in the Min max Log using the indexed read method Write to Table A 23 to select the read back mode and or which of 74 min max records to return on the next read of Table A 25 Min Max Log Results Table A 23 contains 9 integer elements e Password Required to enable disable or clear the min max log 1 for selecting a record
27. Metering Sequence Voltage and Current R F16 27 15 11 e je o Results Metering Power Results R F17 31 16 13 e je je 11 Metering Demand Results R F18 25 17 10 e je je 12 Metering Power Factor Results R F19 33 18 13 e je je 13 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results R W N20 29 19 20 23 e je je 14 Metering Reactive Energy and Amp Hour R W N21 30 21 22 23 e je je 315 Results Selftest Diagnostic Results R N22 36 23 27 e o o DF1 PCCC Diagnostic Status Reply R 6 e o o Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status R W N23 22 24 25 16 e je je Trend Log Configuration Read Back Record R W N24 34 26 27 26 e je je Select Trend Log Results R F25 48 28 14or22 e o Min Max Log Configuration Read Back R W N26 13 29 30 19 e je o Select Min Max Log Results R F27 28 31 11 e o o Event Log Configuration Read Back Record R W N28 9 32 33 6 e je o Select Event Log Results R N29 21 34 14 17 18 e e jo 8 User Configured Table Setup R W N30 35 35 36 26 e je je User Configured Table Results R F31 62 37 14or239 e Je Write Error Status R N32 4 38 2 e je je Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read Back R W N33 14 39 40 9 e je o Select Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and R F34 23 41 gorolle e e More Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 to 21 R F35 39 42 14 e o Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 to 41 R F36 40 43 14 e o Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 to 20 R F37 41 44 14 e o Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 to 40 R F38 42
28. Set Default with No flashing in the second line Press the Down Arrow key to change No to Yes Press the Enter key again to confirm your selection The Display Module will now return to the screen you have selected on power up or after 30 minutes of inactivity on the Display Module Issuing Commands The Display Module allows you to issue commands to the Powermonitor 3000 These commands include relay and KYZ output forcing clearing the Min Max Log clearing energy and amp hour counters status input counters and setpoint counters and restoring the factory defaults To issue a command you must enter Program Mode and enter the correct unit Password Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 19 ATTENTION The relay and KYZ outputs may be connected to field devices Before issuing a command to force an output ensure that any devices connected to outputs cannot operate in an unsafe or undesired manner Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death property damage or economic loss 1 Using the four Display Module keys move into Program mode and display the command to be issued Notice the flashing phase indicators on the right hand side Figure 3 5 Program Mode 2 Set the Display Module into Edit mode by pressing the Enter key Notice that the phase indicators on the right hand side are now solid and the command option prompt is now flashing Figure 3 6 Edit Mode Pu
29. The following example and ladder diagram uses these settings e Node MAC ID 5 e Port 0 e Class 4 e Instance 14 16 18 20 22 17 25 e Attribute 3 e Command 1 4 e Size 3 e Size 3 e Service 14 Explicit Message Transfer Setup The Explicit Message Transfer Block header for this example is assembled in integer file N10 0 The header contains the information for all aspects of the transmission request Each different node or instance requires assembling another file Each file has to be moved in turn to the output MO file starting at word 224 Sample Applications C 17 Refer to Devicenet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1747 5 8 for a detailed description of all coding TXID cmd status Port Size Service MAC ID Class Instance Attributes Word M0 1 224 A unique TXID Transmit Identifier and Command byte is needed for this word The valid command codes are e 1 Execute transaction block e 4 Delete transaction from response queue A command byte of 1 is used first to start the explicit message After a response has been received from the scanner a command byte of 4 is used to remove this transaction from the scanner If the command byte of 4 is not written to the SLC 500 DeviceNet Scanner then it does not process further transactions TXID Cmd TXID x 256 Cmd 20 x 256 1 5121 Word M0 1 225 A port number and transaction body
30. asserted Bit 0 relay setpoint output flag 1 Bit 1 KYZ setpoint output flag 2 Bit 2 setpoint output flag 3 Bit 15 setpoint output flag 16 Status inputs state 0 to3 Bit 0 status input 1 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 1 status input 2 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 2 demand sync timeout 1 the demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync This bit clears when the next external demand sync occurs Refer to Table A 6 Advanced Device Configuration element 23 Bits 3 15 unused always 0 Status input 1 counter 0 to Status input 2 counter 29 999 Counts to 29 999 rolls over to 0 Size and content of Instance 1 may vary depending on user configuration Refer to User Configured Data Pes Table on page 4 51 for more information DeviceNet EtherNet IP and Contro Net I O Data Accepted by Powermonitor Scanner Output Data Instance 2 Element Element name Range No 0 Relay output 0 to 1 1 Solid state KYZ output 0to1 Default Value Comment 0 Bit 8 0 De energize 256 Bit 8 1 Energize Must be enabled by Control source parameter Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 6 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 3 Discrete Data CSP File No N9 Remote 1 0 BT 10 CIP Assy Inst 3 No of Elements o User Configurable No Data Type In
31. jo Cancel Apply Help Data Tables In the SLC 500 data tables table N111 is the destination table for the Read message and N211 is the source for the Write message Table N211 contains the following values for setting the date and time in a Powermonitor 3000 with a password of 0 to January 1 2003 at 12 00 midnight 4Data File N211 dec WRTCLOCK The Read Clock from PM3K and Set Clock from SLC bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 4 Sample Applications code if the message rungs are controlled programmatically ensure that only one message is enabled at a time Ladder Diagram 300 Target Device Local Remote Control Block Control Block Length Setup Screen 01 Peer To Peer Write Target Device 500CP Local Remote Local Control Block 11 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen 302 Message Setup Dialogs This is the Read message dialog Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 5 3MSG N10 0 14 Elements ee es m This Controller m Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address To be retried NR 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channet o Continuous Run CO 0 z Error ER o p Target Device Message done
32. 0 Dest N11 0 Length 32 Continue to swap words until 32 floats have been converted This is enough to handle all power monitor files Q4 1 LES ADD 0001 LBL Less Than A lt B Add Source A N12 0 Source A 1 30 lt 1 lt Source B 62 Source B N12 0 62 lt 30 lt Dest N12 1 29 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 1 0 lt Dest N12 2 0 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 0 0 lt Dest N11 N12 1 0 lt MOV Move Source N12 2 0 lt Dest N11 N12 0 0 lt ADD Add Source A 2 2 lt Source B N12 0 30 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt Q4 1 JMP gt Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 0002 0003 0004 When the swap operation is complete copy the temp file to the designated WR_TRANSFR file EQU Equal Source A N12 0 30 lt Source B 62 62 lt Sample Applications COP Copy File Source N11 0 Dest N14 0 Length 64 C 43 RET Return CEND gt Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 44 Sample Applications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Product Approvals Appendix D Technical Specifications EtherNet IP Conformance Testing All Series B Powermonitor products equipped with an EtherNet IP communications port bear the mark shown below This mark indicates the Powermonitor 3000 has been tested at an Open Device Vendor Association ODVA independent test lab and has passed the EtherNet IP conformance test This test provides
33. 10 mSec Update rates for real time metering data 100 mSec minimum e Update rates for logged data 250 mSec minimum e Supports Allen Bradley pass thru communications Supports network based time synchronization via SNTP Series B e Supports networked demand period synchronization Series B e Supports Class 1 scheduled connection for I O data Series B ControlNet Optional Communications A catalog number ending in CNT specifies a Powermonitor 3000 with a ControlNet communications interface in addition to the native RS 485 port The ControlNet interface has the following features e Adapter class device e Supports redundant media or single media applications physical connections include NAP port and two BNC connectors ControlNet International conformace tested and approved e Compatible with ControlLogix PLC5 SLC PanelView RSEnergyMetrix RSPower32 and more e All Powermonitor data readable writable via unscheduled UCMM or Class 3 connection to Powermonitor assembly object instances 3 64 Product Description 2 9 Terminal Blocks Optional RS 232 Port e Supports scheduled messaging Class 1 connection one assembly instance of configurable content from the Powermonitor and one assembly instance of fixed content to the Powermonitor e Supports
34. 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Ethernet PCCC CSP protocol Series A only Titisetie For future compatibility it is strongly recommended that you use EtherNet IP messaging with Series A Powermonitor 3000 units You may set up messaging from legacy controllers such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 to a Series A Powermonitor 3000 with optional Ethernet communications using peer to peer message instructions In the message setup specify the controller data table address size of the data in elements and the channel the message instruction is to use For the target device Powermonitor 3000 specify its IP address and data table address In the example message setup dialog below the SLC 500 controller is reading the Power table F17 0 from a Powermonitor 3000 with IP address 192 1 1 207 Figure 4 4 SLC 5 05 to Powermonitor 3000 Message Detail Screen Example 7MSG Rung 2 0 N9 0 B5 o F17 0 192 1 1 207 No If you want to execute a sequence of messages condition each message in the sequence with the previous message s done or error status and include a brief programmed time delay between messages so that each message receives fresh data and the communications port is not overloaded As a starting point program the inter message time delay at the nominal update rate of the Powermonitor 3000 see page 3 30 Communications 4 37 For PCCC CSP messaging set the Optional Communications Protocol configuration Series A o
35. 16 bit Configuration 7 fo et Comm Format Daanan O ESAN E fea Node 2 Een Cancel Back Next gt Finish gt gt Help Select Data INT as the Communications Format Enter the ControlNet address of the Powermonitor 3000 Set the Connection Parameters as shown for the default configuration If you change the configuration of the input assembly instance enter its new size in Instance 1 here Select 3 as the Configuration instance and leave its Size set to 0 bytes Click the Next gt button Figure 4 16 Requested Packet Requested Packet Interval RPI 100 04ms 2 0 3200 0 ms T Inhibit Module I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault cmo coat Ve e Set the Requested Packet Interval to 100 mS or greater The Powermonitor 3000 update rate is typically 100 mS The Powermonitor 3000 data will be found in controller tags as shown in Figure 4 17 Communications 4 45 Figure 4 17 Controller Tags gt ional Decimal INTIB PM3K_CNT I Data 0 o Decimal INT PM3K_CNT I Data 1 H ol Decima INT EPM3K_CNT I Data 2 o Decimal INT HPM3K_CNT I Data 3 3 o Decimal INTO G PM3K_CNT I Datal4 0 Decimal INT EPM3K_CNT I Data 5 o Decimal INT F PM3K_CNT 0 TR TR AB CONTROLNE PM3K_CNT C C esol AB CONTROLNE
36. 275V de 0 2 Amp maximum loading 1404 xxxxB xxx 18V to 50V de 15 VA maximum loading Voltage Sense Inputs V1 V2 V3 Input Impedance 1M ohm minimum 399V ac maximum V1 V2 and V3 to N Current Sense Inputs 11 12 13 14 Overload Withstand 15 Amps Continuous 200 Amps for one second Burden 0 05 VA Impedance 0 002 ohms Maximum Crest Factor at 5A is 3 Starting Current 5 mA Status Inputs Contact Closure Internal 24Vdc Control Relay KYZ Output 1 ANSI C37 90 1989 trip duty 1 Solid State KYZ 80mA at 240Vdc 300Vdc Table D 3 Control Relay Rating 50 60 Hz AC rms DC Maximum Resistive Load 10A at 250V 10A at 30V and 0 25A at Switching 2500VA 250V Minimum Load Switching 10mA at 24V 10mA at 24V UL 508 CSA 22 2 IEC Rating B300 0300 Class Maximum Make Values 30A at 120V 0 55A at 125V Inductive Load 15A at 240V 0 27A at 250V 3600VA 69VA Maximum Break Values 3A at 120V 0 55A at 125V Inductive Load 1 5A at 240V 0 27A at 250V 360VA 69VA Maximum Motor Load 1 3 HP at 125V Switching 1 2 HP at 250V 1 Meets ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 standards for trip duty Table D 4 Relay Life Parameter Number of Operations Mechanical 5X 108 Electrical 1X 10 1 Meets ANSI IEEE C37 90 1989 standards for trip duty Technical Specifications D 5 Table D 5 General Specifications
37. 7 User selected parameter 8 8 User selected parameter 9 9 User selected parameter 10 10 User selected parameter 11 11 User selected parameter 12 2 User selected parameter 13 3 User selected parameter 14 14 User selected parameter 15 DeviceNet supports a maximum of 14 user configured parameters 15 User selected parameter 16 16 User selected parameter 17 17 User selected parameter 18 18 User selected parameter 19 19 User selected parameter 20 20 User selected parameter 21 21 User selected parameter 22 22 User selected parameter 23 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 41 Table A 32 Write Error Status CSP File No N32 Remote 0 BT 4 CIP Assy Inst 38 No of Elements 2 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value O0 File instance or BT number See Table A 1 _ Identifies data table written to last value depends on comms type 1 Offending Element 1 Last write was successful 0 to 26 first unacceptable element of unsuccessful write For Remote I O Only 0 Last write was successful 1 t0 27 First unacceptable word of unsuccessful write Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 42 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 33 Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read Back Select
38. 7 and 8 return the Total Records Logged 1000 and 1 respectively Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 12 Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Reading Data from the Trend Log To read the Trend Log use the indexed read method A write to Table A 21 selects which trend log record is read next There are a number of auto increment and manual increment options that may be selected by writing to the Read back Mode element in Table A 21 0 Auto increment start at beginning Start at the oldest log record and index to the next record after each read of the results table 1 Auto increment start at end Start at the newest log record and index to the next record after each read 2 Auto decrement start at end Start at the newest log record and index to the previous record after each read 3 Point to the oldest log record 4 Point to the newest log record 5 Index to the next record after each read of the results table 6 Index to the previous record after each read Only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and Remote I O communications In modes 0 1 and 2 the client need only read the results table repeatedly until the entire Trend Log is read In modes 3 through 6 the client must alternate writes to select the next read back record with reads of the results table You may obtain the number of records in the Trend Log by reading Table A 21 elements 7 and 8 The number of records is element 7 1000
39. Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 New password 0 to 9999 1 1 no action 0 to 9999 new password returns 1 2 Demand period length 99 to Minutes 15 Refer to Demand Calculation on page 3 9 99 3 Number of demand periods 1 to 15 1 4 Predicted demand type 0to2 0 0 instantaneous 1 1st order 2 2nd order 5 KYZ control source 0to8 7 0 None forcing only 5 Vah 1 Wh Forward 6 Ah 2 Wh Reverse 7 Setpoints 3 VARh Forward 8 Discrete control RIO 4 VARh Reverse DeviceNet 6 KYZ pulse output scale 1 to 10 Refer to Relay and KYZ Output Operations on page 30000 6 1 7 KYZ pulse output width 0 40 to mSec 0 0 KYZ style transition 2000 40 to 2000 pulse duration 8 Relay control source 0 to8 7 Same choices as KYZ control source 9 Relay pulse output scale 1 to 10 Refer to Relay and KYZ Output Operations on page 30000 6 1 10 Relay pulse output width 0 40 to mSec 100 0 KYZ style transition 2000 40 to 2000 pulse duration 11 RMS resolution 0to1 0 M4 0 Nominal 1 M5 6 or 8 1 High 12 RMS result averaging 0 to1 0 M4 0 No averaging 1 M5 6 or 8 1 Average of the last 8 results 13 Frequency averaging 0 to 1 1 0 none 1 last 8 cycles 14 Restore factory default 0to1 0 0 No action 1 Restore factory default settings config 5 Clear status input counters 0 to3 0 0
40. Action Type The action that occurs when the setpoint is 0 to 32 see details in 0 triggered Table 5 3 Clear Accumulated Clear the time accumulator for this setpoint Yes N A Time No Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 7 Table 5 2 Setpoint Types Setpoint Type Description Units M4 M6 M8 M5 0 Not used Voltage Volts 2 Current Amps e be 3 Voltage unbalance Percent 4 Current unbalance 5 Neutral current Amps e 6 W Watts e 7 VAR VARs e e e 8 VA VA 9 Total true PF Percent o 10 Total disp PF 11 Total dist PF 12 W demand Watts e 13 VAR demand VARs 14 VA demand VA 15 Amp demand Amps e 16 Projected amp demand Amps e 17 Projected W Demand Watts e 18 Projected VAR Demand VARs 19 Projected VA Demand VA 20 Frequency Hz 21 Phase rotation 22 Crest factor voltage Volts 23 Crest factor current Amps 24 Crest factor 14 Amps 25 IEEE THD voltage Volts je je je 26 IEEE THD current Amps je je e 27 IEEE THD 14 Amps e 28 IEC THD voltage Volts je je fje 29 IEC THD current Amps e 5 30 IEC THD 14 Amps e 31 Status input 1 32 Stat
41. Configuration Read Back Select to configure transient analysis This read write table of 13 floating point elements contains the following configuration command and read back select parameters e Password required for configuration and command Use a valid password or 1 for read back select Range 0000 to 9999 default 0 returns 1 DeviceNet unique write identifier range 32 768 to 32 767 default 0 e Capture number selects a capture for read back Range 0 to 6 default 1 e Cycle number selects a cycle for read back Range 1 to 12 default 1 e Read back mode 0 auto increment mode cycle number increments after each read of Table A 44 1 manual increment mode only mode supported by DeviceNet and Ethernet communications Default 0 Detection mode selects channels to monitor 0 disables transient detection 1 voltage channels only 2 current channels Default 1 Auto threshold set command 0 do nothing 1 set threshold Default 0 e Auto threshold set duration range 1 to 3600 seconds default 10 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Advanced Features 8 21 Auto threshold set margin range 1 0 to 100 0 per cent default 20 0 Voltage trigger threshold range 0 1 to 1000 0 default 10 0 e Current trigger threshold range 0 1 to 1000 0 default 10 0 Threshold Configuration The Powermonitor 3000 compares voltage or current transients against a threshold that you may set manually or command
42. M4 M5 N A 1 to 20 M6 M8 Setpoint Type The parameter value to be evaluated by the 0 to 52 Refer to Table A 19 0 setpoint Setpoint Evaluation The operator used to evaluate the parameter 0 Over forward 0 Condition value 1 Over reverse 2 Under forward 3 Under reverse 4 Equal 5 Not equal lt gt Setpoint High Limit The value being used as a reference to 0 to 10 000 000 Depends ontype 0 activate the setpoint for over comparisons or to deactivate the setpoint for under comparisons Note This parameter is non numeric when viewed via the Display Module and the Setpoint Type is Phase Rotation or Status input Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 6 Setpoint Programming and Operation Table 5 1 Setpoint Configuration Parameter Name Parameter Description Range Units Default Setpoint Low Limit The value being used as a reference to 0 to 10 000 000 Depends ontype 0 deactivate the setpoint for over comparisons or to activate the setpoint for under comparisons Setpoint Action Delay The minimum time in seconds that the 0 to 3600 Sec M4 M5 0 setpoint limit must be exceeded continuously before the setpoint will trigger 0 to 30 000 0 1 Sec M6 M8 Setpoint Release The minimum time in seconds that the 0 to 3600 Sec M4 M5 0 Delay setpoint limit must not be exceeded continuously before the setpoint releases 0 to 30 000 0 1 Sec M6 M8 Setpoint
43. No action 2 Clear counter 2 1 Clear counter 1 3 Clear both 6 Wdog action 0 to 1 1 0 Restart log an event and halt operation 1 Restart log an event and resume Refer to Watchdog Timeout Action on page 3 28 17 Force relay output 0to3 0 0 No change 8 Force solid state KYZ output 0 to 3 0 1 Force energize the relay 2 Force de energize the relay 3 Release force of relay output Overrides setpoint or pulse output control Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 10 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 19 Default relay state in event 0to3 0 0 Last state resume of communications loss 1 Last state freeze 20 Default KYZ state in event of 2 De energize resume communications loss 3 De energize freeze Refer to Communications Loss Behavior on page 6 4 21 DM text scroll rate 0to1 1 0 Slow 1 Fast 22 Energy counter rollover 4to15 Digits 15 Refer to Configurable Energy Counter Rollover on page 3 9 23 Forced demand sync delay Oto 900 Seconds 10 0 Disable 1 to 900 number of seconds delay 24 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 25 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 Table A 7 Native Communication Configuration CSP File No N13 Remote 0 BT 11 CIP Assy Inst 10 Write 11 Read No of Elements
44. RMS Resolution RMS Averaging Frequency Averaging Date Format Date Time Relay State on Comms Loss 8 KYZ State on Comms Loss Watch Dog Action DM Scroll Rate Level 2 k Energy Digits i 4 TT TT Display Display Program 12 Program L2 Configuration Status Commands n Configuration rt Al Ai TT A Confi See Config Catalog Number Force Relay _ 2 __ See Config Menu Accuracy Class Force KYZ i Menu WIN Number Clear Min Max toy Hardware Revision Clear KWH cue Master Module FRN Clear KVARH Counter Device ID Clear KVAH Counter Selftest Status Clear Amp H Counter Code Flash Clear All Energy Counters RAM Clear S1 Counter Data Flash Clear S2 Counter NVRAM Restore Defaults Data Acquisition Clear Setpoint Timers Watchdog Timer Clock Optional Comms Version Number Identifier Type Status DM Status DM FRN Date Time Relay Status KYZ Status S1 Status S1 Count S2 Status S2 Count Output Word Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 16 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Displaying Information The display screen consists of two rows of five alpha numeric LED digits At the right of this screen is a column of phase indicators L1 L2 L3 and N These indicators show which phase or phases is referred to by the information being displayed on the 2x5 screen The phase indicators also indicate program mode by flashing Power Up When the DM power
45. Results Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Param Parameter name No 155 Setpoint 1 type 156 Setpoint 2 type 157 Setpoint 3 type 158 Setpoint 4 type 159 Setpoint 5 type 60 Setpoint 6 type 61 Setpoint 7 type 62 Setpoint 8 type 163 Setpoint 9 type 164 Setpoint 10 type 165 Setpoint 1 evaluation condition 166 Setpoint 2 evaluation condition 167 Setpoint 3 evaluation condition 168 Setpoint 4 evaluation condition 169 Setpoint 5 evaluation condition 170 Setpoint 6 evaluation condition 71 Setpoint 7 evaluation condition 72 Setpoint 8 evaluation condition 73 Setpoint 9 evaluation condition 174 Setpoint 10 evaluation condition 175 Setpoint 1 high limit 176 Setpoint 2 high limit 71 Setpoint 3 high limit 178 Setpoint 4 high limit 179 Setpoint 5 high limit 180 Setpoint 6 high limit 181 Setpoint 7 high limit 182 Setpoint 8 high limit 183 Setpoint 9 high limit 184 Setpoint 10 high limit 185 Setpoint 1 low limit 186 Setpoint 2 low limit 187 Setpoint 3 low limit 188 Setpoint 4 low limit 89 Setpoint 5 low limit 90 Setpoint 6 low limit 191 Setpoint 7 low limit 192 Setpoint 8 low limit 193 Setpoint 9 low limit 194 Setpoint 10 low limit 95 Setpoint 1 action delay 96 Setpoint 2 action delay 97 Setpoint 3 action delay Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 69 C
46. The component analysis results returned include e Positive Sequence Current e Negative Sequence Current e Current Unbalance e Positive Sequence Voltage e Negative Sequence Voltage e Voltage Unbalance e 4 current which is the zero sequence current on a wye system when neutral current is connected to the I4 current input or in delta systems when an external zero sequence transformer is connected to the I4 input Table 3 3 summarizes the voltage and current metering information provided by the Powermonitor 3000 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 6 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Table 3 3 Voltage Current and Frequency Metering Parameter Description Range Units Phase 1 L N Voltage RMS line to neutral voltage of individual phase or 3 phase g to 999 9x1922 Volts Phase 2 L N Voltage average Phase 3 L N Voltage 3 Phase Average L N Voltage Phase 1 L L Voltage RMS line to line voltage of individual phase or 3 phase 0 to 999 9x1022 Volts Phase 2 L L Voltage average Phase 3 L L Voltage 3 Phase L L Voltage Phase 1 Current RMS line current in individual phase or 3 phase average g to 999 9x1922 Amps Phase 2 Current Phase 3 Current 3 Phase Average Current Phase 4 Neutral Current RMS current of phase 4 also known as neutral or 0 to 999 9x1022 Amps zero sequence current Frequency The frequency of the voltage 40 0 to 75 0 Hertz Phase Rotation
47. The phase rotation of a 3 phase system None N A ABC ACB Voltage Positive Sequence Magnitude of positive sequence voltage in a 3 phase 0 to 999 9x1022 Volts system Voltage Negative Sequence Magnitude of negative sequence voltage in a 3 phase 0 to 999 9x1022 Volts system Current Positive Sequence Magnitude of positive sequence current in a 3 phase 0 to 999 9x1022 Amps system Current Negative Sequence Magnitude of negative sequence current in a 3 phase 0 to 999 9x1022 Amps system Voltage Unbalance The ratio between the negative and positive voltage 0 to 100 Percent sequence in a 3 phase system Current Unbalance The ratio between the negative and positive current 0 to 100 Percent sequence in a 3 phase system 1 Expressed in line to neutral volts for Wye and line to line volts for Delta wiring modes Power Results Real power that is the portion of the voltage and current applied to a power system that is doing work is calculated on a per phase Z1 Real Power L2 Real Power 3 Real Power and Total Real Power L1 Reactive Power L2 Reactive Power L3 Reactive Power and Total Reactive Power similarly return that portion of the power used in capacitive or inductive reactance in the power system and doing no work L1 Apparent Power L2 Apparent Power L3 Apparent Power and Total Apparent Power return the apparent power which is the simple mathematical product of the system voltage and system current Publication 1
48. UL 508 listed File E96956 for Industrial Control Equipment and CUL Certified CE Certification If this product bears the CE marking it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of IEC 1010 1 This equipment is classified as open equipment and must be installed mounted in an enclosure during operation as a means of providing safety protection International Standard IEC 529 NEMA UL 508 Degree of Protection The Bulletin 1404 Master Module is rated as IP10 degree of protection per International Standard IEC 529 It is considered an open device per NEMA and UL 508 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications D 3 The Bulletin 1404 Display Module is rated as IP65 degree of protection per International Standard IEC 529 It is rated as Type 4 Indoor per NEMA and UL 508 Follow the recommended ins
49. User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 Refer to Reading Individual Harmonic Values on page 8 12 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 to 1 2 43 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 3 45 Harmonic 4 47 Harmonic 5 49 Harmonic 6 518 Harmonic 7 53 Harmonic 8 55 Harmonic 3 57 Harmonic 10 59 Harmonic 11 615 Harmonic 12 63 Harmonic 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 60 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 49 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 to 62 CSP File No F49 Remote 0 BT 46 CIP Assy Inst 61 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type M8 only Element Elementname Range Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 Refer to Reading Individual Harmonic Values on page 8 12 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0 to 1 2 42 4 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9102 3 44 Harmonic 4 46 Harmonic 5 48 Harmonic 6 50 Harmonic 7 52 Harmonic 8 54 Harmonic 3 56 Harmonic 10 58 Harmonic 11 60 Harmonic 12 62 Harmonic 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 61
50. a level of assurance that the Powermonitor 3000 will interoperate with other conformance tested EtherNet IP devices including devices from other vendors Two representative devices from the Powermonitor 3000 EtherNet IP family of devices the 1404 M405A ENT B and the 1404 M8805A ENT B have been tested by ODVA using EtherNet IP Conformance Test version A2 8 The ODVA website www odva org maintains a list of products that have passed the conformance test at one of their test labs Ether 1P conformance tested ControlNet Conformance Testing All Powermonitor products equipped with a ControlNet communications port bear the mark shown below This mark indicates the Powermonitor 3000 has been tested at a ControlNet International CI independent test lab and has passed the ControlNet conformance test This test provides a level of assurance that the Powermonitor 3000 will interoperate with other conformance tested ControlNet devices including devices from other vendors Two representative device from the Powermonitor 3000 ControlNet family of devices the 1404 M405A CNT A and the 1404 M805A CNT A have been tested by CI using ControlNet Conformance Test version 12 The CI website www ControlNet org maintains a list of products that have passed the conformance test at one of their test labs WcontrolNet Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 D 2 Technical Specifications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 UL CUL
51. addressing node address 64 enables RSNetworx for DeviceNet to configure the node address of the Powermonitor 3000 In addition this allows client devices that support the DeviceNet Offline Connection Set to identify nodes with duplicate addresses and automatically reassign the addresses of the offending nodes AutoBaud allows the Powermonitor 3000 to automatically adjust to the prevailing baud rate of the DeviceNet network Program Baud enables remote baud rate selection With this option selected you may use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to set the Powermonitor 3000 baud rate Any change in baud rate takes place after power is cycled to the Powermonitor 3000 Bus off Interrupt specifies the response of the Powermonitor 3000 to a CAN bus off interrupt The two options are Hold In Reset which stops communications until power is cycled to the Powermonitor 3000 and Reset and Continue which resets communications and attempts to re establish the communications link Default is Hold in Reset You must configure each device on a DeviceNet network with a unique node address Addresses 0 and 64 have special significance 0 is most often used as a scanner address and 64 enables remotely settable node addressing as described above You must also configure each device with the correct baud rate for the network The DeviceNet network must be designed within its recognized design limitations of baud rate trunk line length drop line budget and common
52. assembly instance defined in the transaction body Communications 4 31 e 10 hex 16 decimal Set_Attribute_Single Writes the data contained in the message to the assembly instance defined in the transaction body A convenient way to build Words 0 1 and 2 is to multiply the high byte value by 256 and add the low be byte value using decimal values for each parameter Example TXID 121 Command 1 Word 0 121 256 1 30977 Words 3 through 5 comprise the DeviceNet path Class Instance and Attribute For the Powermonitor 3000 data tables Class 4 Assembly Objects Attribute identifies the data table and Attribute 3 data Word 6 and following words contain data to write to the Powermonitor 3000 Once the message is assembled your ladder program transfers the integer file to the scanner module M0 file starting at word 224 SLC 500 or block transfers the 64 word integer file to the scanner module PLC 5 The ControlLogix controller includes in its instruction set a CIP Generic message instruction that builds the transaction header and path from information you enter into the message setup dialog in RSLogix 5000 Message Configuration msgPM3K_User CIP Generic at Bp tesy dataPM3K_User 0 i Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 32 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The example above is a ControlLogix message instruction to read the user configured ta
53. clear Second hsec 269 Enable disable save status input Refer to Table A 26 Event Log Configuration Read Back Record Select changes to Event log 270 Number of events in the event log 271 Write error status File BT Inst No Refer to Table A 32 Write Error Status 272 Write error status Parameter number Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 72 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Param Parameter name Comment No 273 V1 IEEE THD Refer to Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More 274 I1 IEEE THD 275 V2 IEEE THD 276 12 IEEE THD 277 V3 IEEE THD 278 13 IEEE THD 279 14 IEEE THD 280 V1 IEC THD DIN 281 11 IEC THD DIN 282 V2 IEC THD DIN 283 12 IEC THD DIN 284 V3 IEC THD DIN 285 13 IEC THD DIN 286 14 IEC THD DIN 287 V1 Crest Factor 288 11 Crest Factor 289 V2 Crest Factor 290 12 Crest Factor 291 V3 Crest Factor 292 13 Crest Factor 293 14 Crest Factor 294 THD amp Crest iteration 295 DeviceNet instance 1 data type Refer to Table A 30 User Configured Table Setup 296 Avg IEEE THD V Refer to Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More 297 Avg IEEE THD 298 Avg IEC THD V 299 Avg IEC THD 300 Avg Crest Factor V 301 Avg Crest Factor Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Appendix B Catalog Number Explanation
54. counter to zero Yes No Clear kVARh Counter Resets the kVARh net counter to zero Yes No Clear kVAh Counter Resets the kVAh net counter to zero Yes No Clear Ah Counter Resets the Ah net counter to zero Yes No Clear All Energy Counters Resets all cumulative energy counter to zero Yes No Clear S1 Counter Resets Status 1 counter to zero Yes No Clear S2 Counter Resets Status 2 counter to zero Yes No Restore Defaults Settings Restores all settings to factory default Yes No Clear Setpoint Timers Clears the time accumulated in each setpoint Yes timer No Configuration Using the Display Module The Display Module provides an inexpensive easy to operate method for setting up Powermonitor 3000 parameters to adapt it to your power system and select the performance options you desire You configure the Powermonitor 3000 using Program Mode and Edit Mode of the Display Module Once you have become familiar with the key functions you will find that setting up a new Powermonitor 3000 is a simple process You may configure certain advanced features of the Powermonitor 3000 only via communications Please refer to the appropriate sections of the User manual for more information Refer to Table 3 7 for a summary of basic and advanced device configuration settings You may use a copy of this table to record your configuration settings Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 22 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 14
55. current Negative sequence current Percent current unbalance Voltage per phase L L and L N on 4 wire systems Average voltage per phase L L and L N on 4 wire systems Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Percent voltage unbalance Frequency Phase rotation ABC ACB Real power watts total and per phase on 4 wire systems Reactive power VARs total and per phase on 4 wire systems Apparent power VA total and per phase on 4 wire systems True power factor PF total and per phase on 4 wire systems Displacement PF total and per phase on 4 wire systems Distortion PF total and per phase on 4 wire systems Energy consumption in kilowatt hours kWh forward reverse and net Reactive energy consumption in kVAR hours forward reverse and net Apparent energy consumption in kVA hours Current consumption in ampere hours Demand kA kW kVAR and kVA Projected demand kA kW kVAR and kVA Load factor calculation amps watts VAR and VA IEEE percent THD total harmonic distortion IEC percent THD Distortion Index DIN Crest Factor TIF Telephone Interference Factor K factor IEEE 519 TDD total demand distortion IEEE 519 pass fail calculation on voltage and current Individual percent and RMS magnitude harmonics 1 41 Individual percent and RMS magnitude harmonics 4
56. e Parameter to read The record number to read next or the starting record for auto increment read back mode e Read back mode 0 selects auto increment mode returns the next min max record after each read of the results table 1 selects manual indexed mode only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and Remote I O communications Enable disable Min max Log 0 disables 1 enables Clear Min max Log command 0 takes no action 1 clears the log and writes a time stamp Timestamp of last Min max clear the last four elements store the last clear timestamp read only these elements ignored on a write Table 7 3 Min Max Log Parameter Listing Data Logging 7 15 Param Parameter Name Param Parameter Name Number Number 0 L1 Current 37 Projected Demand 1 L2 Current 38 Projected Demand W 2 L3 Current 39 Projected Demand VAR 3 Avg Current 40 Projected Demand VA 4 L1 N Voltage 41 L1 True Power Factor 5 L2 N Voltage 42 L2 True Power Factor 6 L3 N Voltage 43 L3 True Power Factor 7 Avg L N Voltage 44 3 phase True PF 8 L1 L2 Voltage 45 L1 Displacement Power Factor 9 L2 L3 Voltage 46 L2 Displacement Power Factor 10 L3 L1 Voltage 47 L3 Displacement Power Factor 11 Avg L L Voltage 48 3 phase Displacement PF 12 Frequency last cycle 49 L1 Distortion Power Factor 13 L4 Current 50 L2 Distortion Power Factor 14 Positive Sequenc
57. effective polling rate or scan time is less than the expected packet rate EPR to prevent time out errors You may find the EPR on the Module tab Advanced button e For COS or Cyclic I O messaging verify that the COS Cyclic Inhibit Time is less than the EPR and that the ACK time out is set appropriately You may find these parameters on the Scanlist tab Edit I O Parameters button Please contact Rockwell Automation technical support if you find that the default settings do not result in adequate network performance Explicit Messaging Use explicit messaging to read and write all data tables other than the I O messaging table The specific details of explicit messaging depend upon the master device that initiates the message The example in this section uses an Allen Bradley SLC 500 controller and DeviceNet Scanner 1747 SDN as the master Refer to the DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1747 5 8 for a detailed description of explicit message programming in the SLC 500 Please refer to the Rockwell Automation Knowledge Base for other examples of explicit messaging to a Powermonitor 3000 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 30 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 In the SLC 500 and PLC 5 you assemble the explicit message header in an integer file and transfer it to the scanner module When the response is received you transfer the response from the scanner to another
58. errors Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 38 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 When you select Yes in the MultiHop field the MultiHop tab appears in the dialog Enter the IP address of the Powermonitor 3000 in the 1756 ENET I P field 192 168 4 49 is used here as an example and any integer in the 1756 backplane Slot field See below Figure 4 6 PLC 5 xxE MultiHop Configuration z MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 General TMiultFfep Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop TIBENG IF st 192 168 4 49 ConralLogi Backplane N A 1756 Backplane Slot dec 1 The example below shows the MultiHop configuration for messaging from a PLC 5 xxC ControlNet processor through a ControlLogix Gateway to an Ethernet Powermonitor 3000 Figure 4 7 PLC 5 xxC via ControlLogix Gateway MultiHop Configuration MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop This PLCS 1756 CNB Node dec ix Backplane Ns 1756 Backplane Slot dec 1756 ENET N A LP Address str 192 1 p 4 49 You may choose between two types of ControlLogix to Powermonitor 3000 messaging e PLC 5 Typed read or write which encapsulates a PCCC message within a CIP wrapper e CIP Generic messaging which uses the CIP class instance attribute object model common to DeviceNet Set up the Communication tab in the ControlLogix message instruction the same for each messaging type as shown in the first example below Communication
59. for factory use bit 8 0100h Reserved for factory use bit 9 0200h Display Module status bit 10 0400h Master Module watchdog timer status bit 11 0800h Master Module optional communications status bit 12 15 1000h Reserved for factory use 8000h Configuring the Event Log Using Communications You may configure the Event Log by performing a valid table write to Table A 26 Event Log Configuration Read Back Record Select This read write data table contains these 6 integer elements e Password A valid password is required to set configuration options or 1 to select a record for read back o DeviceNet unique write identifier e Read back mode see below Status input logging 0 disables 1 enables e Number of events logged this read only element is ignored on a write e Time date set logging 0 disables 1 enables Data Logging 7 5 Reading Data from the Event Log Using Communications The Event Log uses the indexed read method Table A 26 is the Read back Select table and Table A 27 is the Results table You may select among a number of read back options for the Event Log 0 Auto increment start at beginning of log 1 Auto increment start at end of log 2 Auto decrement start at end of log 3 Point to the beginning of log 4 Point to the end of log 5 Index to the next record 6 Index to the previous record Indexing occurs after each read of the Results table Only mode 0 1 and 2 are supported by DF1 and Remo
60. or channels These records are transferred to an interface table The client selects the read back mode and or record reads the interface table and reassembles the original data structure VO Type Communications The Powermonitor 3000 supports polled change of state and or cyclical implicit I O messaging depending on the communications options The specific communications setup depends on the communications port type and protocol whether serial Ethernet etc as well as the type of device controlling the communications The following sections will provide more detail Powermonitor 3000 Data Table Attributes Powermonitor 3000 data table attributes include their addressing data access number of elements data type and user configurability Address Data tables are addressed in a number of ways depending on the type of communications and the protocol being used e For serial communications native RS 485 and optional RS 232 and optional Ethernet CSP PCCC communications the CSP Client Server Protocol File Number identifies the table and its data type in message instructions topic configuration or communications commands IMPORTANT CSP file numbers are based on SLC 5 0x data table addressing Because SLC 500 data tables 1 through 8 are assigned specific data types file numbers lower than 9 are not used in the Powermonitor 3000 e For Remote I O communications a unique Block Transfer Size identifies the data table
61. rate 0 to2 0 0 57 6k baud 1 115 2k baud 2 230 4k baud 5 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 13 14 15 6 7 18 19 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 14 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables DeviceNet Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 Node address 0 to 64 63 Address 64 enables remote node address programming there is MAC ID no actual node address of 64 defined for DeviceNet 2 Baud rate 0to4 0 0 125k 1 250k 2 500k 3 Auto 4 Programmable 3 Bus Off Interrupt Action 0 to1 0 0 hold CAN chip in reset 1 reset CAN chip and continue communications 4 Reserved 0 0 Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 12 13 14 15 6 7 18 19 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 15 RS 232 Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0to9999 0 Required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 Hardware port 0to1 0 Select active port 0 RS 232 port 1 Native RS 485 port 2 Protocol 0 0 0 DF1 half duplex slave 3 Delay 0to15 2 10mS Specifies the delay before responding to an external request useful with slow external devices such as RF modems 4 Baud rate 0 to4 3 0 1200 baud 1 2400 baud 2 4800 baud
62. size is needed for this word The port number is the DeviceNet scanner port that handles this transaction an SLC 500uses port 0and the PLC 5 uses port 0 or 1 The size is the number of bytes 2 bytes 1 word in the transaction body which is 6 6 bytes 3 words Port Size Port x 256 Size 0 x 256 6 6 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 18 Sample Applications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Word M0 1 226 A service code and MAC ID is needed for this word The service code is the DeviceNet service that can be use on the Class 4 assembly instances the valid service codes are e 14 Get_Attributes_Single e 16 Set_Attributes_Single The MAC ID is the node number of the device that the DeviceNet scanner is communicating to this example uses node 5 Service MAC ID Service x 256 MAC ID 14 x 256 5 3589 Word M0 1 227 The class number is the first word of the transaction body class 4 is used to retrieve the real time data assemblies Class Word M0 1 2278 The instance number is the second word of the transaction body instance 14 is used to retrieve the real time voltage current and frequency metering information Instance 14 Word M0 1 229 The attribute number is the third word of the transaction body attribute 3 is used to get the metering information Attribute 3 Sample Applications C 19 SLC 500 Sequencer Operation This example uses a
63. so that other operations performed by the ladder will have minimum overhead from communications The following files are of importance when using the ladder example N7 SCNR_FILE The following items are of importance in file N7 0 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 33 Table C 4 Bit Importance N7 0 Read Write N7 0 15 EN Written to by the ladder to enable R W communication transaction N7 0 14 Unused N A N7 0 13 DN bit Response received R N7 0 12 ER bit Error bit returned form SCNR R scanner N7 0 11 CO Continuous mode Not used N A N7 0 10 EW Message taken into account by R 1747 SCNR scanner N7 0 9 SUCCESS Used by ladder for notification R of successful communication transfer N7 0 8 TO The message transaction has timed R While other words in the N7 SCNR_FILE are important to out communications these values are copied from file N9 CIP_SETUP to file N7 N9 CIP_SETUP This file is the CIP message setup file The importance of the following words should be noted Table C 5 ri Description of Function N9 0 Not used by CIP_SETUP N9 1 Target MAC ID Power monitor MAC ID N9 2 Communication transaction timeout setting in ms 2048 recommended N9 3 Complex IOI size Not used and set to 0 N9 4 Service code OxE for Get Attribute Single or 0x10 Set Attribute single N9 5 Class code of Instance Object Power
64. status indication e Operation of the Display Module e Display Module menus and parameter structure e Setup and configuration using the Display Module e Data monitoring using the Display Module e Issuing commands using the Display Module Other Powermonitor 3000 features such as communications setpoint operations I O operations data logging oscillography harmonics sag swell detection load factor calculation and transient detection will be covered later in this manual The Powermonitor 3000 performs calculations on scaled digital voltage and current values Signals connected to the voltage and current inputs are sampled and their instantaneous values are converted to digital values in an analog to digital A D converter section These values are scaled according to configured PT Primary PT Secondary CT Primary and CT Secondary parameters and evaluated according to the configured Wiring Mode parameter Metering results are available for display on the Display Module in the communications data tables and for use in setpoint programming and data logging Table 3 1 provides a summary of measurements produced in each Powermonitor 3000 model and notes which measurements you may view using the Display Module Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 2 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Table 3 1 Summary of Measurements M4 M5 M6 pm Measurement Current per phase and neutral Average current Positive sequence
65. support automation rockwell com 3 Under Support Centers click on Contact Information Internet gt 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com Allen Bradley Powermonitor 3000 RSPower32 RSEnergyMetrix SLC 500 ControlLogix and RSLinx are trademarks and PLC 5 is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association ODVA Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation EtherNet IP and ControlNet are trademarks of ControlNet International LTD Belden is a trademark of Belden Inc Preface Safety Product Description Powermonitor 3000 Operations Communications Setpoint Programming and Operation 1 0 Operations Data Logging Table of Contents Using This User Manual ages ap aie hcg a ane aaa 1 For More Information on Additional Power Quality Products 2 Terms and Conventions o ie este ta eG RUE ta ein 3 Chapter 1 Safety Considerations naaa aaa 1 1 Other Precautions naana uaaa aaa 1 2 Chapter 2 Master Module ashy mutant en naea ep ORS E OEKE 2 2 Display Module Se a xsi A a Riyend aoe Sess HAO i a A Riel dees 2 3 Performance Features hse dk Gauls ete hd aS wale aye Hot 2 4 Communications Options sich niu yd Ash a eee FASO 2 5 LED WCC Alls 4 5 940 prapa get PAHs Span hooey ear hh ane 2 10 Chapter 3 Metering Functionality 64 0 a7 us o
66. the actual demand the utility measures How can you minimize your peak demand in order to reduce your utility demand penalty charges One way is to measure the power being used and project the demand level at the end of the interval This method permits you to reduce power consumption when the projected demand reaches a predetermined threshold thus preventing the final demand from exceeding the desired level Projected Demand Calculation Select the best projection method for your system by comparing the projected values from each method with the actual demand at the end of the interval The three methods of projecting demand are described below Instantaneous The Powermonitor 3000 computes instantaneous demand by substituting the elapsed interval duration for the total interval duration CT in the demand equation It is therefore identical to the standard computation except it integrates the power only over the elapsed interval duration and calculates the average value over the elapsed duration The modified equation thus becomes Table 3 5 Energy and Demand Results Parameter Kilo Watt Hours Forward Description The total real power consumed 0 to 1 0x10 2 kWh Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 11 t2 1 Demand aA e P t dt tl t2 t1 Elapsed interval duration and is less than T First Order Projection The first order demand projection utilizes the instantaneous demand as a starting point computes the trend of the
67. to 999 9x10 2 12 215t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x107 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 36 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 to 41 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F36 Remote 1 0 BT 40 CIP Assy Inst 43 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 8 11 Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0to1 2 Reserved 0 3 23 4 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 4 25th Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 5 27 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x10 2 6 29 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 7 315t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1027 8 33 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 3 35th Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 10 37 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1027 11 39t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 12 415t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 A 45 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 46 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 37 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 to 20 CSP File No F37 Remote 1 0 BT 41 CIP Assy Inst 44 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Element E
68. to be set automatically You select either voltage channels or current channels with the Detection mode parameter When you issue the Auto threshold set command the Powermonitor 3000 first determines if there is sufficient signal amplitude on the selected voltage or current channels to set the threshold If the signal amplitude is greater than 10 of full scale the Powermonitor 3000 begins timing the Auto threshold set duration During this time it monitors the selected channels calculates an average transient index and decrements the Auto threshold duration time remaining parameter At the end of this time it combines the average transient index with the Auto threshold set margin and stores the result as the Voltage trigger threshold or Current trigger threshold Threshold settings relate to both magnitude and duration of a transient so they are representative of the energy contained in a transient In most cases use the automatic threshold calculation as a starting point by issuing an Auto threshold set command Then manually adjust the selected threshold if you want to increase or decrease the sensitivity The Powermonitor 3000 will not monitor for or capture transient data until a threshold setting has been configured Reading Transient Analysis Metering Data The Powermonitor 3000 M8 model presents 12 cycles of transient metering results for each of up to 6 transient captures in Table A 44 This read only table of 14 floating po
69. 0 Lengt 26 EQU COP Equal Copy File Source A Select Source Custom 0 2 Dest Download 0 Source B 1 Lengt 26 EQU COP Equal Copy File Source A Select Source Old 0 2 Dest Download 0 Source B 2 Lengt 26 COP MSG Copy File Type PLC 5 Typed Read EN Source Pwd Message Control msgReadOld E CDN gt Dest Download 0 t CER gt Length 1 The message configuration for the ReadOld message is shown below Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 29 Message Configuration msgReadOld x Configuration Communication Tag l Message Type PLC5 Typed Read v Source Element N30 0 Number Of Elements 26 i Destination Tag oao z NewTag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 26 Error Code I Timed Out Extended Error Code Cance Apply Help This rung inserts a brief time delay before enabling the WriteNew message instruction Start msgReadOld DN TON JE J EN Timer On Delay Timer Timer1 Con gt Preset 100 Accum 0 After clearing the flags from the previous write this rung performs a data table write to transfer the selected user configured data table setup to the Powermonitor 3000 If the number of paramaters in the User Configurable Data Table is changed the Powermonitor 3000 resets Timer1 DN Oneshot_2 Success Failed JE Cons Q gt U MSG Type PLC 5 Type
70. 0 with a table write to Table A 52 Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration This read write table of 20 integer elements contains the following e Password Required to change the unit configuration Input Mode Sets the unit network time sync mode Range 0 Master command input 1 Master status 2 input 2 Slave broadcast input 3 Slave status 2 input default Broadcast port number The UDP port number for the master slave configuration Range 300 to 400 default 300 e Time server IP address The SNTP time address e Time zone Range 12 GMT 12 00 Eniwetok Kwajalein 11 GMT 11 00 Midway Island Samoa 12 GMT 12 00 Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Island Time set update interval Determines how often the unit time is set Range 0 to 32 766 0 Disables the time set function Default 60 Controller Command Table A 53 is a write table consisting of one integer element A 1 written to bit 0 signals the end of a demand period When this occurs the Master Powermonitor resets this bit to 0 and sends the end of demand broadcast to Powermonitor units configured as Slave broadcast input Bits 1 through 15 are reserved Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 28 Advanced Features Configuring the Network A ae 3000 with an Ethernet Series B communication option can configure network demand using the Display Module The aHa from the Display following display menu is available on Series B un
71. 00 0 to 999 Number of records element 7 x 1000 element 8 8 Total records logged x 1 0 to 999 9 Reserved 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 10 Parameter 1 selection 1 to 301 122 Refer to Setting up the Trend Log on page 7 11 11 Parameter 2 selection 0 to 301 126 Defaults 1 Parameters solegidn T00 Parameter 1 122 Net Kilowatt hours i Parameter 2 126 Net kVAR hours 3 Parameter 4 selection 0 Parameter 3 100 Demand watts 14 Parameter 5 selection 15 Parameter 6 selection 16 Parameter 7 selection 17 Parameter 8 selection 18 Parameter 9 selection 0 to 301 0 19 Parameter 10 selection 20 Parameter 11 selection 21 Parameter 12 selection 22 Parameter 13 selection 23 Parameter 14 selection 24 Parameter 15 selection 25 Parameter 16 selection 1 For DeviceNet Powermonitors you may configure parameters 9 through 16 but Table A 22 will return only the first 8 parameters Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 22 Trend Log Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 31 CSP File No F25 Remote 0 BT 48 CIP Assy Inst 28 No of Elements 14 DeviceNet only 22 All other communications types User Configurable Yes Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Reserved 0 Returns 0 1 Internal Identifier 0 to 15 Increment from
72. 00 M6 and M8 models Oscillography captures waveforms of the voltage and current present at the Powermonitor 3000 input terminals A client application reads oscillography records using the indexed read method The main features of oscillography are e Simultaneous capture of all seven voltage and current channels e Non volatile storage of up to 8 M6 or 2 M8 captures e Configurable sampling rate up to 5 4 kHz or 90 samples per cycle at 60 Hz e Captures may hold up to 408 cycles of data per channel at 60 Hz e Configurable data resolution of 13 bit w sign or 7 bit w sign e Configurable pre trigger means the capture includes waveform information prior to the triggering event e Setpoints or communications may trigger oscillogram captures e All communications options support oscillography You may choose to use RSPower32 or RSEnergyMetrix software or create a custom application to configure oscillography and read waveform data Configuring Oscillography You may configure oscillography only via communications The Display Module does not support an interface to oscillography Configure oscillography by performing a table write to Table A 39 Oscillograph Configuration Read Back Data Select This read write table of 11 integer elements comprises the following configuration and command parameters e Password needed to configure the capture type or pre trigger or execute a command to trigger or clear a capture Not needed for read
73. 03 MSG N7 42 14 Elements OY x This Controller Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address F12 0 To be retried NA 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW o Channel Continuous Run CO o Eror ER 0 m Target Device Message done DN fr Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST fo Data Table Address F10 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec a octal a Waiting for Queue Space 0 Local Remote m Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors Error Description Notice that under target device that Powermonitor 3000 data table F10 Basic Configuration was selected The Local Node Address is the address of the Powermonitor 3000 Controlnet Node Address 4 The information to write was loaded into file F12 0 of the SLC and is 9 elements long Communicating to a Powermonitor 3000 from a PLC5 Controlnet Processor The Powermonitor 30000 is capable of communicating over controlnet using PLC5 typed reads and writes When using ladder to communicate unscheduled messages to and from the Powermonitor 3000 the following example applies PLC5 Typed Reads and Writes You can message integer and float files to and from the Powermonitor 3000 using PLC5 typed message instructions as follows Insert a MSG Instruction to the ladder rung and assign a control Communications 4 49 MSG Read Write M
74. 04 UM001C EN P April 2003 Basic Device Configuration The basic unit configuration sets the wiring mode PT ratios and CT ratios to match your power system Every Powermonitor 3000 requires basic configuration To perform basic configuration using the Display Module navigate through these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt BASIC Wiring Mode Select the wiring mode to match the physical configuration of your power system Your wiring mode choice must match the wiring diagrams found in the Installation Manual for proper operation and accuracy Your choices are e Delta 3 CT e Delta 2 CT e Direct Delta 3 CT e Direct Delta 2 CT e Open Delta 3 CT e Open Delta 2 CT e Wye default e Single Phase e Demo You may choose Demo mode for training or demonstration purposes In demo mode the Powermonitor 3000 returns internally generated results PT and CT Ratios You may directly connect the voltage inputs of the Powermonitor 3000 to power systems rated at 600 volts line to line or less Above 600 volts you will need potential transformers PTs to step down the power system voltage to one that is measurable Most commercially available PTs have a secondary rated voltage of 120 volts 150 volts full scale Nearly every Powermonitor 3000 installation will require CTs to step down the power system current to a value of 5 amps full scale To perform basic configuration set the primary and secondary voltage and curren
75. 04 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 41 EtherNet IP 1 0 Connection Series B only Series B Powermonitor 3000 Ethernet units support a Class 1 connection to Instance 1 and 2 To utilize this scheduled connection to a ControlLogix controller open the controller program offline in RSLogix 5000 Select the 1756 ENET B or 1756 ENBT A module in the I O configuration Add the Powermonitor 3000 as a Generic Ethernet Module Figure 4 11 shows a typical configuration If you wish to establish a Class 1 connection with more than one controller to the same Powermonitor use instance 1 and 2 for the first controller and use gt instance 1 and 99 for all remaining controllers instance 99 is a placeholder instance since instance 2 only supports one connection Figure 4 11 1 0 Connection Setup Module Properties ENET ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 x Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENET p Nee My_PM3000 p Connection Parameters A Assembly iption 7 Size Description Example of Class 1 connection Instance setup Input 1 6 a 16 bit a Output 2 2 6b Comm Format I Data INT z Configuration 3 do Sbi Address Host Name ai zea Host Name Status DOPA IP Address 128 1 1 13 Status inpu l Cancel Back Next gt Help Select Data INT as the Communications Format Enter the IP address of the Powermonitor 3000 Set the Connect
76. 1 to 15 for each record rolls to 0 2 Timestamp Year 1998 to 2097 Date and time record was recorded Refer to Expressing Data in 3 Month Date 0101 to 1231 Data Tables on page 4 18 i sown MOTTO 7S 5 0000 to 5999 6 User selected parameter 1 The values of parameters that were configured 7 User selected parameter 2 8 User selected parameter 3 9 User selected parameter 4 0 User selected parameter 5 1 User selected parameter 6 12 User selected parameter 7 13 User selected parameter 8 14 User selected parameter 9 15 User selected parameter 10 16 User selected parameter 11 17 User selected parameter 12 18 User selected parameter 13 19 User selected parameter 14 20 User selected parameter 15 21 User selected parameter 16 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 32 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 23 Min Max Log Configuration Read Back Select CSP File No N26 Remote 1 0 BT 13 CIP Assy Inst 29 Write 30 Read No of Elements 9 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Min max parameter to read 0 to 73 1 Refer to Interfacing with the Min Max Log Using 7 Read back mode Oto 1 0 Communications on page 7 14 3 Enable disable Min
77. 11 Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type See table Element M4 M M Element name Range Comment No M5 6 8 0 e e e Channel number 1 to9 1 e e IEEE THD 0 0 to 1000 0 2 e e IEC thd DIN 0 0 to 1000 0 3 e e e Crest Factor 0 0 to 10 0 4 e e e THD amp Crest iteration 0 to 32767 5 Reserved 0 e je TIF 0 0 to 999 9x1022 6 Reserved 0 e je K Factor 0 0 to 999 9x107 7 Reserved 0 e je IEEE 519 TDD 0 0 to 999 9x107 8 Reserved 0 e e EEE 519 Pass Fail to1 g Reserved 0 e e FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 44 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 35 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 to 21 Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 8 11 CSP File No F35 Remote 0 BT 39 CIP Assy Inst 42 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0to1 2 1St Harmonic Fundamental 0 0 3 3 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 4 5 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 5 7 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 6 gt Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 7 11 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x107 8 13 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x107 3 15t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x107 10 17 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x10 2 11 19 Harmonic 0 0
78. 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 6 Sample Applications The source and destination data tables in the PLC 5 must contain at least as many words as the block transfer length The Read Clock from PM3K and Set Clock from PLC bits are used to initiate the messages and are reset when the message instruction either completes successfully or an error occurs In your application code if the message rungs are controlled programmatically ensure that only one message is enabled at a time and add sufficient time delays between block transfers to avoid overloading the channel Ladder Diagram Module Type Generic Block Transfer Rack 001 Group 0 Module 0 Control Block 10 0 Data File B3 0 BIW Block Transfer Write Module Type Generic Block Transfer Rack DN gt Group Module ER Control Block Data File 0001 0002 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 7 EtherNet IP and ControlLogix The third example reads and writes the Powermonitor 3000 date and time data table using a ControlLogix controller and EtherNet IP communications Note that the Powermonitor 3000 Ethernet port protocol must be CIP or CSP CIP dual stack to enable communications with the ControlLogix controller Tags The example uses two ControlLogix tags PM3K_Date_Time and Set_date_time Both are arrays of 8 INT elements The program also uses two standard MESSAGE tags Read_time and Set_time The following figure shows
79. 2 63 Oscillography capture data Transient voltage and current index RMS voltage and current per phase for each cycle of transient capture Transient capture wave form data 1 If this box is checked you may view the measurement using Display Module If not you may access measurements using communications only Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 3 Metering Accuracy Class Table A 16 element 26 is a read only parameter that indicates the revenue metering accuracy class of the Master Module If this element contains the value 0 the Master Module meets ANSI C12 16 and EN61036 Class 1 requirements for accuracy If this element contains the value 1 the Master Module meets ANSI C12 20 Class 0 5 EN60687 Class 0 5 and Canadian standard CAN3 C17 M84 requirements for accuracy If this element contains the value 2 the Master Module meets ANSI C12 20 Class 0 2 EN60687 Class 0 2 and Canadian standard CAN3 C17 M84 requirements for accuracy The revenue metering accuracy class is also indicated on the side of the Master Module and can be accessed via the Display Module Display status Accuracy Class Table 3 2 Metering Accuracy Class Model Class 1 Class 0 5 Class 0 2 M4 Standard Not Available Not Available M5 Standard Optional M6 Standard Optional M8 Standard Optional Expressing Metered Data on the Display Module The Display Module di
80. 2003 Configured Data Table in a Powermonitor 3000 using a ControlLogix controller via its EtherNet IP Bridge 1756 ENET B Use of the user configured data table to consolidate parameters from different Powermonitor 3000 data tables can increase the efficiency of communications The following example and ladder listing use these settings e IP Address 130 151 70 173 e Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 e Gateway IP Address Not Set Keep Alive Time 30 Seconds e Message type PLC 5 Typed Read Sample Program Operation The ladder program is executed within a continuous task This sample logic reads and saves the existing User Configured Data Table setup file from the Powermonitor 3000 to permit an Undo operation The user must create tags listed in Table C 2 below and enter data correctly to configure the Powermonitor 3000 User Configurable Data Table successfully The Start flag begins the logic execution The Select tag s value determines which configuration is written to the Powermonitor 3000 e 0 Default table setup e 1 Custom table setup e 2 Undo the last write First the logic reads the existing setup table from the Powermonitor 3000 and saves it in the Old tag After a brief delay it writes the selected setup table If the number of parameters in the User Configured Data Table changes the Powermonitor 3000 resets After another delay the write status table is read and if it indicates a successfu
81. 404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 7 For single phase wiring mode all Z3 power values remain at zero and are not included in the total power calculation Power Factor Results The Powermonitor 3000 calculates true displacement and distortion power factor each on a per phase and total 3 phase basis True power factor is the ratio between the total true power and total apparent power in percent and takes into account the effect of phase shift between the voltage and current as well as any harmonics present Displacement power factor is the cosine of the difference between the phase angle of the fundamental voltage and current in percent and reflects the value a typical analog power factor meter would measure The true power factor and displacement power factor are equal only if there are no harmonics present in either the voltage or current These values are signed to show lead or lag Distortion power factor is the ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental and the sum of the magnitudes for all of the current harmonics in percent The power quantities kW kWh kVAR kVARh and power factor are four quadrant measurements The Powermonitor 3000 measures and expresses these measurements in a way that allows you to determine the magnitude and direction of both the real power flow and the reactive power flow Figure 3 1 indicates the relationship between these quantities and the numeric signs used by
82. 45 14 e o Oscillograph Configuration Read Back Data R W N39 15 46 47 11 e je Select Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 3 Table A 1 Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communications Options Data Table Name and Description lo Applies to Refer to s 4 F az L A eo S 3 2 N 2 a _ D gt a X 3 a SarlPe d o 58 S 5 25 lor a BSlss le e 53 aq Fe l r m a E gt 2D j los Oscillograph Results R N40 61 48 29 or e o Table A 40 5g 1 Load Factor Log Configuration Read Back R W N41 16 49 50 6 e je Table A 41 Select Load Factor Log Results R F42 43 51 14 e je Table A 42 Transient Analysis Configuration Read Back R W F43 44 52 53 13 Table A 43 Select Transient Analysis Metering Results R F44 32 54 14 Table A 44 Transient Capture Clear Read Back Data R W N45 17 55 56 13 Table A 45 Select Transient Capture Results R N46 60 57 29 or Table A 46 5g Advanced Metering Configuration R W N47 19 58 59 10 Table A 47 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 to 63 R F48 45 60 14 Table A 48 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 to 62 R F49 46 61 14 Table A 49 Event Log Text R W e N50 37 62 63 23 Table A 50 Catalog Number and WIN R N51 50 64 29 e je je Table A 51 Network Demand Sync and Time R W N52 65 66
83. 6 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 Protocol 0 0 0 DF1 half duplex slave only protocol supported 2 Delay 0to15 5mS 2 Specifies the delay before responding to an external request 10mS useful with slow external devices such as RF modems 3 Baud rate 0to4 3 0 1200 baud 1 2400 baud 2 4800 baud 3 9600 baud 4 19200 baud 4 Device address 1 to 254 1 Identifies the device on a multi drop network 0 is typically used by the DF1 master 255 is the broadcast address 5 Data format 0to2 0 Parity number of data bits number of stop bits 0 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 1 Odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 2 Even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit BH 1 The default address is the Device ID which is fac Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 ory assigned and is found on the label on the side of the master module The device ID is incremented for each device Table A 8 Optional Communication Configuration CSP File No N14 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 11 Remote 1 0 BT 24 CIP Assy Inst 12 Write 13 Read No of Elements 20 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Ac
84. 8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Timestamp Month day 0000 to 1231 Trigger timestamp see page 4 18 1 Hour minute 900 to 2359 2 Second hsee Fyan9 5 5999 3 Capture 1 to 8 M6 Refer to Reading Oscillograph Data on page 8 4 1 to 2 M8 4 Channel number 1to7 5 Block number See page 80 6 Capture type Oto5 7 Trigger source and 0 to 22999 capture identifier 8 Trigger position 1 to 4600 1 to 9200 9 Oscillograph Data Point 1 8192 to 8191 10 Oscillograph Data Point 2 11 Oscillograph Data Point 3 12 Oscillograph Data Point 4 13 Oscillograph Data Point 5 14 Oscillograph Data Point 6 15 Oscillograph Data Point 7 16 Oscillograph Data Point 8 17 Oscillograph Data Point 9 18 Oscillograph Data Point 10 19 Oscillograph Data Point 11 20 Oscillograph Data Point 12 21 Oscillograph Data Point 13 22 Oscillograph Data Point 14 23 Oscillograph Data Point 15 24 Oscillograph Data Point 16 25 Oscillograph Data Point 17 26 Oscillograph Data Point 18 27 Oscillograph Data Point 19 28 Oscillograph Data Point 20 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 50 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Element Element name Range No 29 Oscillograph Data Point 21 30 Oscillograph Data Point 22 31 Oscillograph Data Point 23 32 Oscillograph Data Point 24 33 Oscillograph Data Point 25 34 Oscillograph Data Poi
85. 9 999 to 999 kAh 18 x 10 19 x 10 20 x 10 21 A x 10 22 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 16 Selftest Diagnostic Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 23 CSP File No N22 Remote 1 0 BT 36 CIP Assy Inst 23 No of Elements 27 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Bulletin number 1404 1 Series 0to8 0 A 1 B etc 2 Overall status 0 0K 3 Data Acquisition status 0 0K bit 0 overall status 0 pass 1 fail bit 1 reserved bit 2 data bus connection failure bit 3 address test failure 4 Data FLASH status 0 0K 5 Real time clock status 0 0K 6 RTC NVRAM status 0 0K Non zero indicates corruption of non volatile memory This does not cause product to shutdown The error is cleared on a reset power cycle If this error is detected date time and energy values are reset 7 Option communications status 0 OK or no optional communications present 8 Display module status 0 0K or no DM connected 9 Watchdog status 0 0K 10 Code FLASH status 0 0K bit 0 overall status 0 pass 1 fail bit 1 boot code checksum failure bit 2 application code checksum failure bit 3 calibration CRC failure bit 4 no calibration dat
86. 99 9x102 4 L3 L1 or L3 N Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 5 L1 Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 6 L2 Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 7 L3 Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 8 L4 Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 9 Voltage Index at trigger 999 0x10 to 999 0x102 10 Current Index at trigger 999 0x102 to 999 0x10 11 Voltage Trigger Threshold 0 0 to 999 0x102 12 Current Trigger Threshold 0 0 to 999 0x102 13 Unique Transient Capture ID 0 to 30000 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 45 Transient Capture Clear Read Back Data Select Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 55 CSP File No N45 Remote 0 BT 17 CIP Assy Inst 55 Write 56 Read No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Applies to Table 45 Transient capture results Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Dnet unique write 32768 to 32767 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 4 33 identifier 2 Capture number 0 to 6 1 Refer to Reading Transient Capture Data on page 8 22 3 Channel number 1to7 1 4 Block number See page 90 1 5 Read back mode 0to2 0 6 Clear command 0 to 3 0 7 Reserved 0 0 8 Reserved 0 0 9 Reserved 0 0 10 Capture clear status 0 to 63 11 Capture ready status 0 to 63 12 Reserved 0 0
87. 999 9x10 2 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 48 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 39 Oscillograph Configuration Read Back Data Select CSP File No N39 Remote 1 0 BT 15 CIP Assy Inst 46 Write 47 Read No of Elements 11 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Applies to Table A 40 Oscillograph Results Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Capture No 0 to 8 M6 1 Refer to Configuring Oscillography on page 8 1 0 to 2 M8 2 Channel No 1to7 1 3 Block No See page 8 2 1 4 Read back mode 0 to2 0 5 Clear trigger command 0 to 10 0 6 Capture type 1to5 0 7 Pre trigger 0 to 100 90 8 Reserved 0 0 9 Capture clear status 0 to 255 10 Capture ready status 0 to 255 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 40 Oscillograph Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 49 CSP File No N40 Remote 1 0 BT 61 CIP Assy Inst 48 No of Elements 29 DeviceNet only 59 all other communications types User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M
88. Allen Bradley Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 1404 M4 1404 M5 1404 M6 1404 M8 User Manual ll H I i i i J Rockwell Automation i Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of these products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resulting from the use or application of these products Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Rockwell Automation office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such
89. DN Message Timeout 5 ________ Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec octal Waiting for Queue Space fo Local Remote Local m Error Error Code Hex 0 r Eror Description No errors The Write message setup is similar 2MSG N11 0 14 Elements 5 x m This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if timed out TO Data Table Address To be retried NR 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel Continuous Run CO 0 Error ER Message done DN o Message Timeout 5 _______ Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec octal Waiting for Queue Space fo m Target Device Local Remote r En Error Code Hex 37 r Eror Description Message timedout in local processor PLC 5 Controller Using Remote 1 0 The second example also reads and writes the Powermonitor 3000 date and time but using a PLC 5 controller and Remote I O In this example a Powermonitor 3000 has a logical address of Rack 1 Group 0 The PLC 5 data table files used are the same as in the previous example The main difference is that this example uses block transfer instructions rather than message instructions and the block transfer length determines which data table is selected Publication
90. Data Table messaging Yes No use PLC 5 typed or CIP generic SLC 500 Typed CIP messaging Yes No use PLC 5 typed or CIP generic Table 4 9 Series A and Series B Comparison Communications 4 35 Function Series A Comms FRN Series B 2 01 or 2 02 RSPower32 support 2 10 and later 2 40 and later RSEnergyMetrix support 1 00 00 1 00 00 RSEnergy support 2 00 13 CSP only No upgrade to RSEnergyMetrix The Powermonitor 3000 supports the following network requests Table 4 10 Ethernet Message Types Message type Series A Series B CIP PLC 5 Typed Write CIP PLC 5 Typed Read e e CIP Generic Assembly Object class 04 Get amp Set Attribute Single for Attribute 3 data CIP Generic Assembly Object class 04 Get Attribute Single for Attribute 3 size ep IP SLC 500 Typed Write QD IP SLC 500 Typed Read ep IP Data Table Read using CSP PCCC addressing e g F15 0 E IP Data Table Write CSP PCCC PLC 5 Typed Write CSP PCCC PLC 5 Typed Read CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Read 2 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Read 3 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Write 2 address fields CSP PCCC Protected Typed Logical Write 3 address fields CSP PCCC Diagnostic Loopback Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 36 Communications Publication
91. Description 00 Status input 1 state 01 Status input 2 state 02 05 Reserved returns 0 06 New oscillograph M6 M8 only Indicates at least one capture has been triggered saved and is ready to be read This bit is cleared when all captures are cleared 07 11 Reserved returns 0 12 14 Reserved used internally for BT information 15 Reserved returns 0 Data appears in the first two words of the input image table corresponding to the Powermonitor 3000 logical rack For example with the unit configured as Rack 1 Group 1 in a 1747 SN scanner residing in Slot 2 the data will appear in words I 2 8 and 1 2 9 of the data table Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 5 Remote 1 0 Discrete Data Accepted by Powermonitor Master Output Data Element No Element name Relay control 0 or 128 KYZ control Comment 0 Bit 8 0 De energize 128 Bit 8 1 Energize Must be enabled by Contro source parameter DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet 1 0 Data Provided by Powermonitor Scanner Input Data Instance 1 Element No 0 Element name Relay output status 0 to3 1 Solid state KYZ output status Comment 0 De energized amp not forced 1 Energized amp not forced 2 Forced de energized 3 Forced energized Alarm output word 0 to FFFF Bitfield indicates state of 16 alarm output flags 0 released 1
92. Description M4 M M Action type M5 Action type M5 6 8 1 Energize relay and alarm flag 1 e je 23 Clear setpoint 1 time e je 2 Energize KYZ and alarm flag 2 e je 24 Clear setpoint 2 time e je 3 Set alarm flag 3 e je 25 Clear setpoint 3 time e je 4 Set alarm flag 4 e je 26 Clear setpoint 4 time e je 5 Set alarm flag 5 e je 27 Clear setpoint 5 time e je 6 Set alarm flag 6 e je 28 Clear setpoint 6 time e je 7 Set alarm flag 7 e je 29 Clear setpoint 7 time e je 8 Set alarm flag 8 e e 30 Clear setpoint 8 time e je 9 Set alarm flag 9 e je 31 Clear setpoint 9 time e je 10 Set alarm flag 10 e e 32 Clear setpoint 10 time e je Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 9 Table 5 3 Setpoint Action Type Setpoint Description M4 M6 M8 Setpoint Description M4 M Action type M5 Action type M5 1 Set alarm flag 11 e je 33 Clear setpoint 11 time 12 Set alarm flag 12 e je 34 Clear setpoint 12 time 13 Set alarm flag 13 e je 35 Clear setpoint 13 time 14 Set alarm flag 14 e je 36 Clear setpoint 14 time 15 Set alarm flag 15 e je 37 Clear setpoint 15 time 16 Set alarm flag 16 e je 38 Clear setpoint 16 time 17 Save a trend log record e je 39 Clear setpoint 17 time 18 Clear kWh result e je 40 Clear setpoint 18 time 19 Clear kVAR
93. Element name M4 M Range Units Default Comment No M5 8 Value 0 Password e 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration Returns 1 1 Wiring mode e 0to8 6 0 Delta 3 CT 1 Delta 2 CT 2 Direct Delta 3 CT 3 Direct Delta 2 CT 4 Open Delta 3 CT 5 Open Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 7 Single Phase 8 Demo 2 Potential transformer PT e 1 0 to Volts 480 0 The high side of the PT ratio xxx xxx primary 10 000 000 0 3 PT secondary e 1 0 to 600 0 Volts 480 0 The low side of the PT ratio xxx xxx 4 11 12 13 current transformer e 1 0 to Amps 5 0 The high side of the CT ratio xxx xxx CT Primary 0 000 000 0 5 11 12 13 CT secondary e e 1 0 to 5 0 Amps 5 0 The low side of the CT ratio xxx xxx 6 14 CT primary e 1 0to Amps 5 0 The high side of the 14 CT ratio xxx xxx 10 000 000 0 7 14 CT secondary e e 1 0 to 5 0 Amps 5 0 The low side of the 14 CT ratio xxx xxx 8 Nominal system voltage e 1 0 to Volts 480 0 Value is used in the default Sag and Swell 10 000 000 0 setpoints M6 and M8 only Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 8 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 5 Date and Time CSP File No N11 Remote 1 0 BT 12 CIP Assy Inst 6 Write 7 Read No of Elements 8 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Default
94. Energize relay and set alarm flag 1 e Refer to Table A 3 Discrete Data 2 Energize KYZ and set alarm flag 2 3 Set alarm flag 3 4 Set alarm flag 4 5 Set alarm flag 5 6 Set alarm flag 6 7 Set alarm flag 7 8 Set alarm flag 8 9 Set alarm flag 9 10 Set alarm flag 10 11 Set alarm flag 11 12 Set alarm flag 12 13 Set alarm flag 13 14 Set alarm flag 14 15 Set alarm flag 15 16 Set alarm flag 16 17 Save a trend log record e Saves record even if periodic trending is disabled 18 Clear kWh result 19 Clear kVARh result 20 Clear kVAh result 21 Clear Ah result 22 Clear all energy results Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 29 Param Parameter name M4 M Comment M5 8 23 Clear setpoint 1 time e Clears the corresponding setpoint time accumulator 24 Clear setpoint 2 time 25 Clear setpoint 3 time 26 Clear setpoint 4 time 27 Clear setpoint 5 time 28 Clear setpoint 6 time 29 Clear setpoint 7 time 30 Clear setpoint 8 time 31 Clear setpoint 9 time 32 Clear setpoint 10 time 33 Clear setpoint 11 time 34 Clear setpoint 12 time 35 Clear setpoint 13 time 36 Clear setpoint 14 time 37 Clear set
95. M8 e Table A 36 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 23 to 41 M6 and M8 e Table A 37 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 2 to 20 M6 and M8 e Table A 38 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 to 40 M6 and M8 e Table A 48 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 to 63 M8 only e Table A 49 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 42 to 62 M8 only Advanced Features 8 13 Each of these tables consists of 14 floating point elements containing the following parameters e Channel 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 I2 5 V3 6 13 7 14 Mo averages Type of harmonic data 0 per cent harmonic distortion 1 magnitude e Nth harmonic expressed according to the type parameter Magnitude type is referenced to the primary side of PTs and CTs Range 0 0 to 999 9 10 FFT iteration each new FFT calculation used in the previous four parameters increments by one from 0 to 32 767 and rolls back to 0 In Tables A 36 A 37 and A 38 the first nth harmonic element is reserved and returns a value of 0 Sag and Swell The Powermonitor 3000 M6 and M8 models are is capable of detecting voltage sags and swells There are many definitions for sag and swell IEEE 1159 defines sag as A decrease to between 0 1 and 0 9 pu in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations of 0 5 cycle to 1 minute IEEE 1159 defines swell as An increase in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations from 0 5 cycles to 1 min
96. NT The relay output contacts and solid state KYZ output contacts on the Powermonitor 3000 may be used to control other devices through setpoint control or communications The response of these outputs to a communications failure is configurable by the user Be sure to evaluate the safety impact of the output configuration on your plant or process The Default output state on communications loss defines the behavior of the output if the Powermonitor 3000 experiences a loss of communications What constitutes a communications loss depends on the protocol A Remote I O unit declares a communications loss if it has detected more than 100 mSec between valid frames or more than 255 consecutive valid frames not addressed to it A DeviceNet unit declares a communications loss when the network master scanner has not polled it within the Expected Packet Rate that you configured when setting up the I O connection You may select one of the following behaviors for each output Last state resume holds the output in its last state during a communications loss and resume the output control when communication recovers Last state freeze holds the output in its last state during a communications loss and freezes the output in this state when communication recovers You may clear the freeze by placing the logic controller into program mode changing the behavior to last state resume or cycling power to the Powermonitor 3000 e De energi
97. Number U 4 8 lt Source B 4 4 lt EQU Equal Source A N9 6 8 lt Source B 52 52 lt Allow the scanner to write to the power monitor Put the new integer configuration data in N14 starting at location 0 Put the configuration i it is of float type in file F13 starting with word 0 Enter the rest of the CIP message information needed for transfer in N9 starting with word 0 The process is similar to the request of information except that the size in words of the data to write is to appear in N7 9 and the service to be performed is changed Allow Write Message Pending N9 11 B3 0 FLL J E Jt Fill File 0 0 Source 0 Dest N7 0 Length 65 COP Copy File Source N9 0 Dest N7 0 Length 10 COP Copy File Source N14 0 Dest N7 10 Length 64 COP Copy File Source N7 10 Dest M0 3 1100 Length 65 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 CL gt Ah 15 COP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest M0 3 1000 Length 10 Message Pending B3 0 CLS SA 0 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 38 Sample Applications This rung looks for the done bit with no errors When the done bit is received the return information is tranfered and mainten ance is performed Integer information can be read from file N10 0 Float information can be read from F8 0 The enable and done bit s are turned off and the bit N7 9 is latched to notify the user that the transfer wa
98. Relay and KYZ Output Operations Status Input Operations Data Logging 7 Event Log Configurable Trend Log Min Max Log Advanced Features 8 Oscillography Harmonic Analysis Sag and Swell Load Factor Transient Detection Metering and Capture Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Catalog Number Explanation Sample Applications Technical Specifications mol avn gt Frequently Asked Questions Glossary Glossary Index Index Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Preface 2 For More Information on Additional Power Quality Products Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 What This User Manual Does Not Contain Topics related to installation and wiring are not covered in this manual Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions publication 1404 IN007 for the following information e Selecting an enclosure for the Powermonitor 3000 and associated equipment e Mounting and wiring of the Master Module e Mounting and connection of the Display Module refer to publication 1404 IN005 e Selection and connection of current transformers CTs and potential transformers PTs e Wiring to native and optional communications ports For this information Refer to Publication Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions all communication options 1404 IN007 Bulletin 1404 Power
99. Supports DeviceNet heartbeat facility Ethernet Optional Communications A catalog number ending in ENT specifies a Powermonitor 3000 with one active 10BaseT Ethernet communication port in addition to the native RS 485 port The Ethernet port has the following performance features e Connect to Allen Bradley PLC 5E SLC 5 05 ControlLogix Ethernet Bridge and the 1761 NET ENI module products e Built in Internet web page support e Compatible with RSPower32 RSEnergyMetrix RSView32 and RSTrend software e Ethernet communication rate 1OMbps Series A 10 100Mbps Series B Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 8 Product Description Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 e Compatible with commercially available network bridges routers hubs and switches e Fully software configurable e Supports RSLinx Series A emulates SLC 5 03 with Ethernet Series B emulates a ControlLogix Ethernet Bridge e Supports Allen Bradley Client Server Protocol CSP Series A only e Supports EtherNet IP CIP protocol e Configurable I O channel assembly instance six parameters default twenty three maximum e Configurable explicit assembly instance seventeen parameters default twenty three parameters maximum Explicit assembly instances for access to all data e Two I O assembly instances Remotely resettable through Identity Object e Supports up to 64 CIP HTTP concurrent connections e Data read latency less than
100. The display module is a highly recommended option Q Can I power the power monitor from the source being monitored A Yes but it s not advisable Assuming a voltage match logging of power outages and voltage phase loss anomalies would be difficult if not impossible Q What determines what information I get using RIO block transfers A The word length of the block transfer Q My Volt and Amp readings look good but why are my power numbers way off A One or more Current Voltage transformers are wired with reverse polarity or improper phase sequence Q What size fuses do I use for my voltage inputs A Size the fuses to the National Electric Code for the size of the wire being used Q Why do I need shorting terminal blocks for the current transformers A If for any reason the meter s current transformer wires are removed or disturbed to cause an open circuit in the Current Transformers secondary while primary current is applied a hazardous voltage will occur which may cause personal injury death property damage or economic loss Q Can I monitor several loads from one monitor A It is not advisable to switch current transformer inputs Besides the need for special current transformer switches confusion over logged data and setpoint activation would also have to be considered Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 E 2 Frequently Asked Questions Q Can I change communications networks
101. You may view setpoint setup parameters and status by navigating through these menus DISP gt CONFIGURATION gt SETPOINT selecting the setpoint number and scrolling through the setpoint setup parameters status and accumulated activated time Writing Setpoint Configuration Using Communications To configure setpoint operations using communications the client performs a table write to Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status This read write data table of 16 integer elements includes the following e Password A valid password is required to enable disable or clear the min max log Write a value of 1 when simply selecting a setpoint Setpoint number Selects a setpoint for configuration or read back or indicates the currently selected setpoint on a read e Read back mode 0 selects auto increment 1 selects manual increment only mode supported by DeviceNet and Ethernet units Setpoint type Refer to Table 5 2 e Evaluation condition 0 Over forward 1 over reverse 2 under forward 3 under reverse 4 equal 5 not equal see above e High and low limits Expressed in integer exponent format Action and release delays Expressed in seconds M4 M5 or tenths of a second M6 M8 Output action Refer to Table 5 3 Status O indicates released 1 indicates activated this read only element is ignored on a write e Accumulated time Expressed in integer exponent format Clear time accumulator command
102. a bit 5 wrong application firmware loaded 1 RAM status 0 0K bit0 read write test failure 2 Application FRN 0 to 9999 100 indicates V1 00 103 indicates V1 03 etc 13 Boot code FRN 0 to 9999 100 indicates V1 00 101 indicates V1 01 etc 14 ASIC build 0 to 9999 Revision number of the code which was used to fabricate the ASIC 15 Option communications FRN 0 to 9999 100 indicates V1 00 103 indicates V1 03 etc 0 none catalog numbers ending in 000 232 6 Display module FRN 0 to 9999 104 indicates V 1 04 105 indicates V1 05 etc Returns 0 if no DM connected 7 Reserved 0 Returns 0 8 Digital board revision Oto7 0 02A 1 03A etc 9 Analog board revision 0to7 0 02A 1 03A etc Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 24 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Element No 20 Element name Reserved 0 Comment Returns 0 21 Reserved 0 Returns 0 22 MM Device ID 0 to 255 Sequentially assigned at time of manufacture May not be changed 23 Master Module type current 4 5 6 0r 8 4 M4 5 Mb 6 M6 8 M8 reflects any upgrades 24 Display module type 0to1 0 No display module connected 1 1404 DM connected to master module 25 Option communications type 00 No optional communications native RS 485 only 81 DeviceNet V1 82 ControlNet 84 Remote 1 0 85 Ethernet Series A 86 RS 232 88 DeviceNet V2 89 IEC870 comm card
103. a bbb ccc ddd You may set each number also called byte or octet within the range of 0 to 255 decimal The default IP address is 128 1 1 x where x is the factory assigned Unit ID number A Powermonitor 3000 Series A only with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 will get its operating IP address subnet mask and gateway IP address from a bootp server on power up An IP address of 255 255 255 255 is not permitted IMPORTANT The IP address for your Powermonitor 3000 must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Contact your network administrator to obtain a unique IP address for your unit The IP address is a 32 bit binary number which consists of the network address NetID and the machine address HostID The Subnet Mask defines the boundary between the NetID and HostID in the IP address Each 1 bit in the subnet mask represents the NetID and each 0 represents the HostID Here is an example IP Address decimal 192 J 1 207 binary 11000000 00000001 00000001 11001111 Subnet decimal 255 255 255 0 Mask binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Net ID Host ID In this example the NetID is 192 1 1 0 and the HostID is 0 0 0 207 The relationship between NetID and HostID depends on the IP Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 15 address class the discussion of which is beyond the scope of this document the example uses a Class C IP addre
104. able A 7 Native Communication Configuration and Table A 8 Optional Communication Configuration in Appendix A Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 2 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Native RS 485 Communications Your Powermonitor 3000 is set up to communicate via its native RS 485 port when you first power it up except for units with an optional RS 232 communication port The communications configuration includes the following parameters e Protocol Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave e Data rate Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 baud Default 9600 e Delay Range 0 to 75 mS 10 mS default e Data Format 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity or even parity Default no parity Node address Range 1 to 254 default is the same value as the unit ID listed on the nameplate The Delay parameter is the time the Powermonitor 3000 waits before its response to an external request Certain communications equipment requires such a delay for reliable operation To change your native port configuration use the Display Module under the PROGRAM gt NATIVE COMMUNICATIONS menu You may connect your Powermonitor 3000 into an RS 485 network with up to 32 nodes connected with 2 conductor shielded twisted pair cable with a maximum cable length of 1 219 meters 4 000 ft The maximum data rate supported by the Powermonitor 3000 is 19 2 Kbaud You must use a device configured as a DF1 polling master to commun
105. ad Data Communications 4 21 Powermonitor 3000 Data Server Element 0 1 2 3 4 5 n Target Table Element 0 1 Data Element 0 1 Table 31 Write error status Optional verification Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 22 Communications Simple Reads of Data Tables The following considerations apply to simple Powermonitor 3000 data table reads e An entire data table or a contiguous portion down to a single element may be read except for Remote I O and DeviceNet optional communications which require that an entire table be read e The target data location should match the size and data type of the data requested You may use simple reads to obtain basic metering data configuration data date and time and the contents of the user configured data table Figure 4 2 Simple Data Table Read Flow Diagram Programmable Controller Powermonitor 3000 Data Client Data Server A A Element 0 Initiates Data Read Source Address Starting Element Data Length Target Address Source Table Target Location Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 23 Indexed Reads of Large Data Structures Large data structures that require indexed reads are most often read into a computer based application that performs further processing of the data The Powermonitor 3000 parses logs oscillogr
106. age 69 L3 N Voltage 70 Avg L N Voltage 71 L1 L2 Voltage 72 L2 L3 Voltage 73 L3 L1 Voltage 74 Avg L L Voltage 75 Frequency last cycle 76 Metering iteration 71 L4 Current Refer to Table A 10 Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results 78 Positive Sequence Current 79 Negative Sequence Current 80 Current unbalance 81 Positive Sequence Voltage 82 Negative Sequence Voltage 83 Voltage unbalance 84 Phase rotation 85 Average frequency 86 Frequency source Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 67 Param Parameter name Comment No 87 L1 Real Power Refer to Table A 11 Metering Power Results 88 L2 Real Power 89 L3 Real Power 90 Total Real Power 91 L1 Reactive Power 92 L2 Reactive Power 93 L3 Reactive Power 94 Total Reactive Power 95 L1 Apparent Power 96 L2 Apparent Power 97 L3 Apparent Power 98 Total Apparent Power 99 Demand Current Refer to Table A 12 Metering Demand Results a Demand Power a oO Demand Reactive Power Demand Apparent Power an Projected Demand Projected Demand W an Projected Demand VAR a Projected Demand VA a an Elapsed demand period time a an L1 True Power Factor an L2 True Power Factor L3 True Power Factor 3 phase True PF L1 Displacement Power Factor L2 Displacement Pow
107. al for he M4 and High for the M5 M6 and M8 Demand Setup You may configure the demand period length the number of demand periods to average for demand calculation the forced demand delay and the type of calculation used for projected demand Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 26 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Demand Period Length sets the length in minutes 1 to 99 of the demand period used for demand and projected demand calculation Range 99 to 99 default 15 e A positive value other than 0 configures the Powermonitor 3000 to use its internal clock to measure the demand period e A setting of zero 0 configures the Powermonitor 3000 to use the utility pulse connected to status input 2 to synchronize the demand interval e A negative value configures the Powermonitor 3000 to use its internal clock for calculating projected demand and the utility pulse to calculate actual demand Number of Demand Periods specifies how many demand intervals are averaged together to a floating window demand calculation For instance to configure a 30 minute floating window specify 2 as the demand period length and 15 as the number of demand periods Range 1 to 15 default 1 Forced Demand Delay is a timeout setting that waits for x number of seconds before ending a demand period when the external demand sync input function is being used When a missed external demand sync is detected e The unit forces
108. al phase current 21 L2 L3 and average 3 phase current Z4 current returns neutral or zero sequence current refer to symmetrical component analysis discussion below Frequency results include Last cycle frequency and Average Frequency calculated over your selection of either one or the last eight cycles Frequency results return 0 if either the frequency is less than 40 Hz or if the voltage magnitude on all 3 voltage inputs is too low Frequency results return 999 if the frequency is greater than 75 Hz The Powermonitor 3000 selects one voltage phase input for frequency calculations and automatically switches to another in case of a phase loss Frequency source indicates which phase is used to calculate frequency results Frequency source is accessible only via communications Phase rotation returns a value indicating forward ABC reverse ACB or no rotation RMS Resolution and Averaging There are a number of configuration options in the Powermonitor 3000 that affect metering results RMS Resolution the high resolution setting provides more accurate RMS results when significant levels of harmonics are present You may also configure for nominal resolution if you require faster update rates but can accept lower accuracy as a trade off The M4 default is Nominal The M5 M6 M8 default is High RMS Result Averaging the default setting provides a more steady result by averaging the results of the last 8 calculations Yo
109. ample 2 Phase reversal relay To use setpoint 2 to energize the output relay as a permissive for starting a three phase motor you could use the following settings Setpoint number 2 Setpoint type 21 Phase rotation Setpoint evaluation condition 4 Equal Setpoint high limit 1 ABC Setpoint low limit Not used Setpoint action delay 0 second M4 M5 0 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint release delay 0 seconds M4 M5 0 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint action type 1 Energize relay 1 and set alarm flag 1 Example 3 Oscillogram capture on demand To use setpoint 3 to capture an oscillogram when you push a button connected to status input number 2 you could use these settings Setpoint number 3 Setpoint type 32 Status input No 2 Setpoint evaluation condition 4 Equal Setpoint high limit 1 On Setpoint low limit Not used Setpoint action delay N A M4 M5 5 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint release delay N A M4 M5 5 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint action type 43 Capture oscillogram Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 11 Configuring Setpoints Using the Display Module You may configure setpoint operations by navigating through the PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt SETPOINT menus selecting a setpoint number and programming the appropriate parameters Viewing Setpoint Data Using the Display Module
110. ams harmonic analysis results setpoint status results and other large data structures into individual records to be read by the client and reassembled into the original data structure You may select one of two modes for indexed table reads Auto Increment the Powermonitor 3000 automatically points to the next record following each read of the specified results table e Manual Increment the client specifies a record to be read during the next read of the results table by performing a write to the applicable read back select table IMPORTANT Ethernet and DeviceNet communications options support only manual increment mode The client selects the read back mode by writing to the Read back Mode element in the appropriate read back select table For native RS 485 optional RS 232 or optional Remote I O the auto increment mode provides the highest data throughput In manual increment mode the client must alternate writes of the read back select table with reads of the read back table Figure 4 3 shows the flow of alternating writes and reads required for the manual increment mode 1 The client writes to the appropriate read back select table to identify the desired data block record or channel For selecting a read back record the client may write either a valid password or a value of 1 to the password element in the read back select table 2 After a short time delay the client reads the results table verifies t
111. an end to the current demand period Records an event log record of the event e Records a trend log record if the trend log interval is set to 1 Sync with demand setting e Sends out a demand sync broadcast when configured as a Master and the unit is a series B with an Ethernet communication card option e Starts the projected demand calculations from the beginning again Entering a value of 0 will disable this function For more information about this feature read the section Network Demand Synchronization Ethernet Series B only page 8 26 Projected Demand Type specifies the type of calculation used for projected demand Selections are e Instantaneous default e First order e Second order Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 27 Relay and KYZ Pulse Operation Setup Use these configuration parameters to select how the relay and KYZ solid state outputs are controlled Relay control source controls the selection which includes e Disabled e Wh forward e Wh reverse e VARh forward e VARh reverse e Vah e Ah Setpoints default e Remote I O or DeviceNet discrete control The Pulse output scale factor sets the number of measurement increments per pulse Range 1 to 30 000 default 10 The Pulse output width parameter determines the pulse width in milliseconds Range 40 to 2 000 or 0 to transition the output KYZ style Default is 0 Metering optio
112. apture timestamp in three elements using the standard timestamp format except the year is omitted Capture number in the range 1 to 8 M6 or 1 to 2 M8 e Channel number in the range 1 to 7 see above e Block number block number of the data contained in the table see above e Capture type in the range of 1 to 5 see table above e Trigger statistics see below Range 0 to 22 999 e Trigger position data point corresponding with the trigger position See below Oscillograph data points See below The data client sets up the read back configuration with a table write to Table A 39 the content of which is described above As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communications support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message before each read of the results table For all other communications options auto increment all channels or auto increment current channel read back mode will provide the highest communications throughput Waveform Data Points The results table contains 20 data points for optional DeviceNet communications or 50 data points for all other communications options Data points are numbered 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 in each read The client calculates each data point s place in the waveform using the following formula N J t poimosc logram Notock 1 N jatapoint_this_read Ndatapoint_oscillogram the sequence number of the data p
113. arameter 1 Watt hours forward 2 Watt hours reverse 3 VAR hours forward 4 VAR hours reverse 5 VA hours 6 Ampere hours Set the Output width to the desired pulse duration in milliseconds Set this parameter to zero 0 if you want the output to toggle instead of pulse This operation emulates the KYZ operation of electromechanical energy meters For a two wire KYZ connection use only one side of the relay For a three wire KYZ connection use both sides of the Form C output In a two wire interface KY connection an output event occurs only when the output contact closes In a three wire connection an event occurs when either the KY or KZ contact closes Therefore twice as many output events occur in a three wire connection as in a two wire connection for the same number of relay transitions Set the Output scale for the number of increments of the Control source parameter it takes to pulse or toggle the selected output Follow these suggested steps to calculate the output scale 1 Determine the maximum value of the selected parameter expected in an hour period This is related to the feeder capacity For example a 480 volt 1200 ampere three phase feeder can supply approximately 100 kW or 100 kWh per hour 2 Divide this maximum parameter value by 3 600 to determine the maximumvalueexpectedpersecond Inourexample weroundthisto 280 Wh per second 3 Selectamaximumpulserate Thisshouldbebetween2and5pulsesper second
114. as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you aware of safety considerations The following annotations and their accompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazard avoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of a potential hazard Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices Or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Rockwell Automation Support Before you contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance we suggest you please review the troubleshooting information contained in this publication first If the problem persists call your local distributor or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following ways Phone United 1 440 646 5800 States Canada Outside United You can access the phone number for your States Canada country via the Internet 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http
115. ata Point 27 36 Data Point 28 37 Data Point 29 38 Data Point 30 39 Data Point 31 40 Data Point 32 41 Data Point 33 42 Data Point 34 43 Data Point 35 44 Data Point 36 45 Data Point 37 46 Data Point 38 47 Data Point 39 48 Data Point 40 49 Data Point 41 50 Data Point 42 51 Data Point 43 52 Data Point 44 53 Data Point 45 54 Data Point 46 55 Data Point 47 56 Data Point 48 57 Data Point 49 58 Data Point 50 8192 to 8191 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 57 Comment DeviceNet returns only 20 data points per read Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 58 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 47 Advanced Metering Configuration CSP File No N47 Remote 0 BT 19 CIP Assy Inst 58 Write 59 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration returns 1 1 Meter result set 0to2 0 Refer to Advanced Metering Options on page 3 27 2 Reserved 0 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 48 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 43 to 63 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 59 CSP File No F48 Remote 0 BT 45 CIP Assy Inst 60 No of Elements 14
116. back select use 1 Default 0000 e Capture number selects a capture for read back or returns the last capture selected Range 1 to 8 M6 or 1 to 2 M8 Default 1 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 2 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Channel number selects a channel number or returns the last channel number selected Range 1 V1 2 11 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 I 7 I4 Default 1 Block number selects a data block for the next read or returns the last block selected Range depends on communications type See below Default 1 e Read back mode selects a read back mode or returns the last mode selected Range 0 to 2 default 0 See below Clear trigger command clears one or all captures or triggers a new capture Always returns 0 In the M8 model values of 3 through 8 have same meaning as 0 Options are listed below 0 no action 1 clear capture 1 2 clear capture 2 3 clear capture 3 M6 only 4 clear capture 4 M6 only 5 clear capture 5 M6 only 6 clear capture 6 M6 only 7 clear capture 7 M6 only 8 clear capture 8 M6 only 9 clear all captures 10 initiate a new capture Capture type selects sample rate and data resolution or indicates selected sample rate and resolution Range 1 to 5 default 0 1 disables oscillography See Table 8 1 e Pre trigger specifies how much of the captured waveform occurred before the triggerin
117. ble assembly instance 37 Because the floating point word order in the ControlLogix controller is reversed from that in the Powermonitor 3000 your ladder logic will need to p reverse the word order so the data may be interpreted correctly The SWPB instruction performs this function Up to four concurrent explicit messaging connections are supported by the DeviceNet communications port DeviceNet Message Types The Powermonitor 3000 supports the following message types Table 4 6 DeviceNet Message Types Group CAN Identifier Message Type Field 1 01101Xxxxxx Slave s 1 0 COS or Cyclic message 0111 1XxXxxxx Slave s 1 0 poll response or COS Cyclic ACK message 2 10xxxxxx010 Master s COS Cyclic ACK message 10yyyyyy011 Slave s explicit unconnected response message 10Xxxxxx1 00 Master s explicit request message 10xxxxxx101 Master s I 0 poll command COS Cyclic message 10xxxxxx110 Group 2 only unconnected explicit message request 10xxxxxx111 Duplicate MAC ID check message 3 11101xXXXXX Unconnected explicit response 1111 OXXxxxxx Unconnected explicit request 4 Not used XxXxxxx Destination MAC ID node no 6 bit field yyyyyy Source MAC ID node no 6 it field DeviceNet Class Services As a group 2 slave device the Powermonitor 3000 supports the following class and instance services Communications 4 33 Table 4 7 DeviceNet Class Services hex dec
118. blication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 20 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 Choose the option of the command by pressing the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys until the desired option is displayed Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side remain solid and the command option being selected is still flashing Figure 3 7 Command Option 4 After the desired command option is displayed press the Enter key to execute the command The selection prompt reappears and the Display Module is set back to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are flashing again and the option prompt is now solid Figure 3 8 5 To abort a command press the Escape key The Display Module returns to Program mode and the option prompt is displayed again Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are now flashing and the option prompt is now solid Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 21 Table 3 6 Commands Parameter Description Range Force Relay Forces relay to a known state in which the relay De energize remains at that state until the force is removed Energize No Force Force KYZ Forces KYZ to a known state in which the relay De energize remains at that state until the force is removed Energize No Force Clear Min Max Log Resets the Min Max log with the current real Yes time metering information No Clear kWh Counter Resets the kWh net
119. by 90 degrees Lagging current means lagging power leading current The current flowing in a circuit which is mostly capacitive If a circuit contains only capacitance the current leads the applied voltage by 90 degrees Leading current means leading power factor load Any device or circuit consuming power in an electrical system load shedding The removal of load from the line to limit load and control demand level load restoring The energization of loads that were previously removed from the line to limit load and control demand level neutral The conductor chosen as the return path for the current from the load to the source It is also a voltage reference point in a power system Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Glossary 4 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 ohm The unit of electrical resistance One ohm is the value of resistance through which a potential difference of one volt will maintain a current flow of one ampere peak demand The highest average load over a utility specified time interval during a billing period If there is no ratchet clause in the rate schedule then the peak demand is also the billing demand polyphase Having or utilizing several phases A polyphase power circuit has several typically three phases of alternating current with a fixed phase angle between phases potential transformer PT An transformer with the primary winding connected in parallel w
120. capabilities up to 32 nodes e Update rate 100 mSec minimum Read Write data table access to all data e One user configurable data table e Supports DF1 half duplex communications protocol Used for field firmware upgrades Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 6 Product Description Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 RS 232 Optional Communications A catalog number ending in 232 specifies a Powermonitor 3000 with one RS 232 communications ports in addition to the native RS 485 communications port The optional RS 232 communications port uses the Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave protocol The user selects which of the two ports is active as the two ports may not be used concurrently The RS 232 port has the following performance features e Baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 RS 232 cable length 15 24 m 50 ft maximum e Cable type 3 wire shielded Belden 9608 e Point to point wiring e Update rate 100 mSec minimum Read Write data tables for access to all data e One user configurable data table e Supports DF1 half duplex slave communications protocol Remote 1 0 Optional Communications A catalog number ending in RIO specifies a Powermonitor 3000 with a Remote I O communication port in addition to the native RS 485 communications port The Remote I O option permits concurrent use of both communications ports The Remote I O port has the following performance features e One quarter rac
121. ce on a DeviceNet network It will serve data to a DeviceNet master station such as a PLC 5 or SLC 500 DeviceNet scanner a ControlLogix DeviceNet bridge module a PanelView operator terminal and RSLinx direct and pass thru DeviceNet drivers It supports I O Gmplicit Messaging Explicit Server Messaging and the explicit Unconnected Message Manager UCMM as discussed below 10 Messaging The Powermonitor 3000 supports polled change of state and cyclic I O messaging using assembly instances 1 for input data and 2 for output data The default input messaging table size is 6 integer elements and the output table size is 2 integer elements This corresponds to a DeviceNet scanner mapping of 12 Rx and 4 Tx bytes See Table A 2 on page A 4 for the contents of the default I O messaging tables You may reconfigure the input messaging table instance 1 by selecting up to 23 integer or 14 floating point parameters through a table write to gt assembly instance 35 Refer to User configured I O on page 4 52 If you change the size of the input table you must also re map the inputs into the DeviceNet scanner using RSNetworx for DeviceNet Polled I O messaging can automatically provide fresh data at update rates as fast as 100 mS The Powermonitor 3000 supports both Every Scan and Background polled messaging You select the poll type and polling rate using RSNetworx for DeviceNet software e Every Scan Polls the Powermonitor 3000 once per scan Se
122. cess Read Write PM3000 Type All Select the table that applies to your Powermontior 3000 Ethernet Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 IP address byte a 0 to 255 128 Format aaa bbb ccc ddd Static IP address of this IP address byte b 1 device for example 130 151 32 86 Address 0 0 0 0 3 IP address Dvi 7 enables bootp server to assign IP address subnet mask aa a and gateway If connected to a network IP address must be unique 255 255 255 255 is not permitted 4 IP address byte d Device ID Factory assigned device ID 5 Subnet mask byte a 0 to 255 255 Format aaa bbb ccc ddd Ignored if bootp enabled 6 Subnet mask byte b 255 7 Subnet mask byte c 255 8 Subnet mask byte d 0 9 Gateway IP address byte a 0 to 255 128 IP address of the gateway on this subnet used to route 10 Gateway IP address byte b 1 messages to other subnets wide area networking 1 Gateway IP address byte c 1 ignored boaip granie 12 Gateway IP address byte d 1 13 Keep Alive Time ENT Series Oto 3600 Seconds 30 The maximun time a socket is dedicated to a A connection that is not responding Reserved ENT Series B Reserved on Series B Must be 0 on a write returns 0 14 Protocol select ENT Series A 0 Oto2 When master module firmware gt V1 12 amp Ethernet Reserved ENT Series B firmware gt V2 01 0 CSP CIP concurrent support for both p
123. ct Bud Ge oes oS 3 1 Display Module Functionality 0000 3 12 Configuration Using the Display Module 3 21 Metering Update Rate 2470 weak eh oy ped BA hes 3 30 Chapter 4 Configuring Communications cus weed eek See Oa eee Bh 4 1 Data Messaging Overview 0 ee 4 16 Data Messaging Application Considerations 4 25 Chapter 5 Theory of Setpoint Operation 0000 5 1 Configuring Setpoints o oo AN a a 5 5 Chapter 6 Relay and KYZ Output Operations ioc sek ean 4 6 1 Status Input Operations 25s ce5 2 e478 a ee Pees seh 25 6 5 Chapter 7 Event LOG oo aviv 4 Bond Pan FER Ew E a See S var BERS 7 1 Configurable Trend Log ent 92 8 dale do ge Ged oh SAS ads ag Ht Rien 7 8 Mi MaX OO 5 te do wre Saud dade et bbl hat ak Eee 7 13 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table of Contents ii Advanced Features Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Catalog Number Explanation Sample Applications Technical Specifications Frequently Asked Questions Glossary Index Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Chapter 8 Oscillosrap ysis oa 6 8 kG ARS CAGES SE ER OLE SES D a 8 1 Harmonic Analysis 2 44 ddland ME be Se Ae ON 8 6 SA a Swell hcg ots awa ie Boe a a PA E ea ee e 8 13 Load Factors enre Ge rA Kin FERS DLS Ge Bk BREE A HG 8 15 Transient Detection Metering and Capture 8 19 Network Demand Synchronization Ethernet Series B only 8 26 Configuring
124. ct Description NETWORK STATUS Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table 2 7 Ethernet Optional Communications Series A catalog numbers ending in ENT LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition Link Off Ethernet connection is inactive Steady Green Ethernet connection is active RX Off Ethernet is idle no active data present on port Flashing Red Active data is present on Ethernet port TX Off Powermonitor 3000 is not transmitting any data through the Ethernet port Flashing Red Powermonitor 3000 is transmitting data Table 2 8 EtherNet IP Optional Communications Series B catalog numbers ending in ENT LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition LNK Off No valid physical Ethernet connection Steady Green Valid physical Ethernet connection ACT Strobing or Powermonitor 3000 transmitting onto Solid Yellow Ethernet F1 Off Not Used F2 Off Not Used NETWORK STATUS Off No power Flashing Green No established connections Steady Green Connected has at least one established connection Flashing Red Connection timeout one or more connections to this device has timed out Steady Red Duplicate IP the IP address assigned to this device is already in use Flashing Green Red Selftest this device is performing a power up self test Product Description 2 13 Table 2 9 ControlNet Optional Co
125. d DIN Both of these total harmonic distortion calculation methods provide a summary indication of the amount of distortion due to harmonics present in a system The standard IEEE definition of harmonic distortion is Total Harmonic Distortion THD and is computed for each channel as follows Where e H magnitude of the n harmonic n lt 41 or 63 e H magnitude of fundamental The standard IEC definition of harmonic distortion is the Distortion Index DIN and is computed for each channel as follows Where H magnitude of the n harmonic DIN n S41 or 63 e DIN is equivalent to IEC THD Crest Factor This is another quantity that is sometimes used to describe the amount of distortion present in a waveform It can also be used to express the dynamic range of a measurement device Crest Factor is the ratio of the peak to the RMS Crest Factor Peak Value RMS Value A pure sinusoid Crest Factor equals J2 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 8 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 TIF Another method of measuring signal distortion is the Telephone Influence Factor sometimes called the Telephone Interference Factor This measurement is used to estimate the effect that the power line harmonics have on nearby analog telephone conductors This method weighs each of the harmonics based on the physiological and audiological characteristics of the human ear The harmon
126. d Write EN Message Control msgWriteNew E C DNy b C ER gt msgWriteNew DN Counter1 CU TON J JE Timer On Del m imer On Delay Timer Timer gt COND Preset 4000 Accum 0 The message configuration for writing the new configuration table to the Powermonitor 3000 is shown below Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 30 Sample Applications Message Configuration msgWriteNew Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 31 Timer2 delays evaluating the write status until the Powermonitor 3000 has reset This rung evaluates the results of writing the new configuration The Failed flag asserts if the WriteNew message instruction errors out or if the GetStatus instruction errors out twice or if the write status indicates bad data in the download table If there is a bad data indication verify that word 0 of the download table is the correct Powermonitor 3000 password that word 1 is a value of 31 decimal and that at least one or more words beginning with word 3 are non zero Then try toggling start again Counter1 increments if the GetStatus message errors out The logic will wait until Timer2 times out and then retry the GetStatus message When the operation is complete with no errors the Success flag asserts and the Start flag is cleared Timer2 DN j MSG Type PLC 5 Typed Read EN Message Control msgGetStatus E CDN gt L CER gt
127. digits For instance the Display Module supports a resolution of five significant digits The Trend Log which is used for automatic data re population in some energy logging applications such as RSEnergyMetrix supports twelve significant digits with eight digits of precision Demand Calculation A typical industrial utility bill includes not only an energy or kWh charge but also a Demand charge Demand is equal to the average power level during a predefined time interval Some power providers may base demand on current VA or VARs instead of kW This interval continuously repeats and is typically between five and 30 minutes in length The formula for kW demand is shown below t T 1 Demand 7 P t dt T Demand interval duration t t Time at beginning of interval P t Power as a function of time Usually a utility rate tariff includes a peak demand charge determined by the peak demand that occurs during a specified period which may be one month one year or some other duration As a result only one occurrence of a high demand level can have a long term effect on your utility bill The peak demand value indicates to the utility the reserve capacity they need to satisfy your short term power requirements The peak demand charge helps to pay the utility for maintaining this instantaneous capacity The Powermonitor 3000 computes demand levels for watts VA amps and VARs and provides three different methods for projecting de
128. e 1 Clear all transient captures 0 No action 1 Clear capture 1 2 Clear capture 2 3 Clear capture 3 4 Clear capture 4 5 Clear capture 5 6 Clear capture 6 At least one capture location must be clear for a transient detect event to be processed If no captures are clear the Powermonitor 3000 ignores any new transient detection events The Ethernet Series B Powermonitor 3000 supports demand period synchronization via the Ethernet network Demand period synchronization makes use of UDP User Datagram Protocol messaging a simplified low level protocol that supports broadcasts A Powermonitor 3000 may be configured as a Master or a Slave A Master may be configured to receive an end of interval EOD signal either from a dry contact connected to its Status Input 2 or via a Controller Command write to Table A 53 When a Master receives an EOI input it broadcasts an EOI message to any units configured as Slaves Network Time Synchronization Series B Ethernet units also support synchronization of their internal clocks from an SNTP server at a configurable synchronization interval Since SNTP servers operate in UTC Universal Coordinated Time a time zone for the Powermonitor 3000 must also be configured for the correct time to be set The time zone is configured as an offset in hours from UTC formerly known as GMT Advanced Features 8 27 Network Demand Configuration Configure the Powermonitor 300
129. e IEC THD DIN Total harmonic distortion in per cent based on the IEC definition Range 0 0 to 1000 0 e Crest factor Range 0 to 10 e THD amp Crest iteration each new calculation increments by one from 0 to 32 767 and rolls back to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 12 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The remaining elements are reserved in the M4 and M5 models and return values of 0 gt e TIF Telephone influence factor Range 0 0 to 999 9 1072 e K factor Range 0 0 to 999 9 10 e JEEE 519 TDD Total demand distortion Range 0 0 to 999 9 1072 JEEE 519 Pass fail 1 unknown 0 fail 1 pass FFT iteration each new FFT calculation used in the previous four parameters increments by one from 0 to 32 767 and rolls back to 0 A data client may determine the relative freshness of data by comparing the THD amp crest iteration or FFT iteration parameters in repeated reads of this table Reading Individual Harmonic Values The M6 and M8 models provide several data tables containing individual harmonic results Write to Table A 33 to select the read back mode data type magnitude or distortion per cent and or channel number of harmonic data A data client reads the tables listed below in indexed read back mode to obtain individual harmonic data In auto increment mode read Table A 34 to index the channel e Table A 35 Harmonic Results Odd Harmonics 1 to 21 M6 and
130. e No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Catalog text char pair 1 32768 to Catalog number without dashes Each element contains a character pair 1 Catalog text char pair 2 32767 For each character pair character 1 element 256 and character 2 2 Catalog text char pair 3 Sls e 6th character of the catalog string reflects the Current model of the 3 Catalog text char pair 4 product 4 Catalog text char pair 5 5 Catalog text char pair 6 6 Catalog text char pair 7 7 Reserved 0 Returns 0 8 9 Hardware series 0 to 25 Indicates the series of the product 0 A 1 B etc 10 WIN text character pair 1 32768 to WIN warranty identification number This is the same 10 character T1 WIN text character pair 2 32767 alpha numeric string printed on the master module label Each element 7 WIN text character pair 3 contains a character pair 13 WIN text character pair 4 14 WIN text character pair 5 15 Reserved 0 Returns 0 16 17 Original model 0to9 The model as it was originally built 4 M4 5 M5 etc 18 Current model Differs from Original model if field upgraded 19 Reserved 0 Returns 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 52 Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 63 CSP File No N52 Remote 1 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 65 66 No of Element
131. e Current 51 L3 Distortion Power Factor 15 Negative Sequence Current 52 3 phase Distortion PF 6 Current unbalance 53 V1 IEEE THD 17 Positive Sequence Voltage 54 11 IEEE THD 18 Negative Sequence Voltage 55 V2 IEEE THD 19 Voltage unbalance 56 12 IEEE THD 20 Average frequency 57 V3 IEEE THD 21 L1 Real Power 58 13 IEEE THD 22 L2 Real Power 59 14 IEEE THD 23 L3 Real Power 60 V1 IEC thd DIN 24 Total Real Power 61 11 IEC thd DIN 25 L1 Reactive Power 62 V2 IEC thd DIN 26 L2 Reactive Power 63 12 IEC thd DIN 27 L3 Reactive Power 64 V3 IEC thd DIN 28 Total Reactive Power 65 13 IEC thd DIN 29 L1 Apparent Power 66 14 IEC thd DIN 30 L2 Apparent Power 67 V1 Crest Factor 31 L3 Apparent Power 68 11 Crest Factor 32 Total Apparent Power 69 V2 Crest Factor 33 Demand Current 70 12 Crest Factor 34 Demand Power 71 V3 Crest Factor 35 Demand Reactive Power 72 13 Crest Factor 36 Demand Apparent Power 73 14 Crest Factor Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 16 Data Logging Table A 25 Min Max Log Results is a read only data table consisting of 11 floating point elements containing the following information e Parameter See Table 7 3 above e Min and max values Timestamps for Min and Max values in four element timestamp format Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Oscillography Chapter 8 Advanced Features In this chapter we will discuss major features that are found only in the Powermonitor 30
132. e Display Module does not support an interface for transient detection Transient detection e Continuously monitors all 3 voltage or 3 current channels e Identifies transients at least 200 microseconds in duration e Triggers a transient oscillogram capture when it detects a transient e Records captures each containing 12 cycles 6 cycles preceding and 6 cycles following the transient Stores up to six transient captures of all 7 voltage and current channels in non volatile memory e Calculates RMS voltage and current values for each cycle in each capture e Stores each data point in the capture with 13 bit plus sign resolution e Monitors for transients on your choice of voltage channels or current channels e Automatically or manually adjusts transient detection thresholds You may configure a detected transient to trigger a setpoint which may then trigger an oscillogram capture providing zoom capability All communications options support transient configuration metering and capture Use RSPower32 or RSEnergyMetrix software or create a custom application to configure and read transient data The following information provides details of the data table interface for transient detection Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 20 Advanced Features Figure 8 2 Transient Capture 400 200 YULLS o Bw mye Bw Transient Analysis Configuration Perform a table write to Table A 43 Transient Analysis
133. e The methods used for reading and writing the system clock are applicable to reading and writing every other Powermonitor 3000 data table Read or write selectable data tables using an SLC 5 05 controller and ControlNet Scanner and unscheduled messaging See Table A 5 on page A 8 for details of the Date and Time data table We will look at four methods of reading and writing the system clock SLC 500 Controller and Native RS 485 Communications This example reads and writes the date and time table using the SLC 500 controller Channel 0 serial port and the native RS 485 communications port on the Powermonitor 3000 You must supply an RS 232 to RS 485 converter such as a 1761 NET AIC or B amp B Electronics 485SD9TB between the SLC 500 controller and the Powermonitor 3000 Serial Port Setup The SLC 500 serial port setup using a 1761 NET AIC adapter is shown in Figure The specific settings will depend on your selection of RS 485 to RS 232 adapter Sample Applications C 3 Channel Configuration E x General Chan 1 System Chan 0 System Chan 0 User Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master ig Node Address fo decimal Baud 19200 z N Parity NONE x Stop Bits fi x m Protocol Control Control Line NoHandshaking ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Error Detection CRC h Poling Mode Msq Don t allow Slaves to Initiat IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries Bo Reply Msg Timeout x20 ms H Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms
134. e accumulator eje 38 Setpoint 5 time accumulator eje 39 Setpoint 6 time accumulator eje 40 Setpoint 7 time accumulator eje 41 Setpoint 8 time accumulator eje 42 Setpoint 9 time accumulator o 43 Setpoint 10 time accumulator eje 44 Voltage Sag e e Refer to Sag and Swell on page 8 13 45 Voltage Swell Sale 46 Transient detected 2 e Triggers a setpoint when a transient has been detected 47 Avg IEEE THD V e Refer to Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More 48 Avg IEEE THD jo 49 Avg IEC thd V jo 50 Avg IEC thd jo 51 Avg Crest Factor V ele 52 Avg Crest Factor ele 1 A setpoint activates when the magnitude of any phase passes the activation limit and releases when all phases pass the release limit in the appropriate direction for the setpoint evaluation condition 2 These se point types apply only to the applicable Powermonitor 3000 models and will appear as inactive on other models Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 28 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 20 Setpoint Output Actions Applies to Refer to Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status on page A 25 PM3000 Type See table Param Parameter name M4 M M Comment M5 8 0 None e No output action but recorded in the event log and Setpoint status recorded 1
135. e number N10 INT_DATA The length is the number of P gt elements in the assembly instance being read Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 35 Writing Information through the SCNR Scanner Observe the sample of the CIP_SETUP file for the writing the configuration of the basic configuration table Instance 4 of the power monitor Data File N9 dec CIP_SETUP Iof x 0 0 0 0 x E CE N9 11 Radix Decimal Columns 10 E Properties Usage Help The write procedure differs slightly from the read process N9 4 service has been changed to 0x10 or 16 decimal Set Single Attribute N9 6 is the write P gt instance assembly number of the power monitor basic configuration table N9 9 is the size of the table in words for a 1404 M805A CNT A The size for float tables is 2 times the number of elements Integer tables are 1 times the size of the table elements When a 1 is written to location N9 11 the contents of file F13 WR_TRANSFR are sent to the power monitor In this case starting with float F13 0 through F13 8 The writing of an integer file sends the contents of N14 WR_TRANSFR For further reading on the functionality of the 1747 SCNR scanner refer to user manual Publication 1747 RM623B EN P Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 36 Sample Applications Powermonitor 3000 Ladder Example for SLC through SCNR While message is pending bring back the CIP me
136. ect parameter for clearing or presetting See below e Energy counter values expressed in integer array format see page 4 18 o Metering iteration increments by 1 with each new set of results rolls to 0 at 32 767 The Parameter select bitfield value selects the parameter or parameters to be cleared or preset during the current write as shown in the table below Bitfield value Parameter Binary Decimal Table 14 Table 15 000 0 001 1 kWh forward kVARh forward 010 2 kWh reverse kVARh reverse 100 4 kVAh kAh 111 7 All All You may select the value at which the energy counters roll over to 0 in Table A 6 Advanced Device Configuration User Configured Data Table If your application requires monitoring a small number of parameters normally found in different data tables and you need to conserve communications bandwidth then the Powermonitor 3000 user configured data table may be an ideal solution To use this table your data client application performs a write to Table A 30 User Configured Table Setup containing the desired parameters that you select from Table A 54 Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table To read the user configured table perform a table read of Table A 31 User Configured Table Results Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 52 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The user configured table setup includes the following elements e Password needed t
137. ed Setpoint triggered Setpoint released Setpoint Number A setpoint activated A previously active setpoint released Relay force energized Relay force de energized Relay force released Relay Number 1 Form C relay 2 KYZ Status input set Status input cleared Status Input Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 KWh counter set or cleared 1 Records command action 8 KVARh counter set or cleared 2 8 KVAh counter set or cleared 3 8 Ah counter set or cleared 4 8 All energy counters cleared 5 8 Trend log cleared 6 8 Min max log cleared 7 8 Factory defaults restored 8 8 Status input 1 counter cleared 9 8 Status input 2 counter cleared 10 8 Reserved 11 8 Single setpoint timer cleared 12 8 All setpoint timers cleared 13 9 Power up 0 Control power was applied 10 Power down 0 Control power was lost or internal reset occurred 11 e Selftest failure Status Error Code Refer to Table A 28 Status Error Codes bitfield 12 Date time set 0 The date and or time was set or altered 13 Change of non setpoint config data 0 14 Change of setpoint config data 0 15 NVRAM Clr 0 NVRAM has been cleared due to an extended loss of control power or internal error 16 Transient detected 17 User Comment User has manually entered a comment to record t
138. ee table A 39 e e Add 5mS If Transient detection is enabled see table A 43 e Add 15mS If Meter Result Set is set to Tranducer mode or e Subtract 5mS Emergy Meter Mode see table A 47 Table 3 9 lists the minimum and maximum possible metering update rate for each model based on information from Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Min and max metering update rate for each model Model Min and Max metering update rate M4 55 80mS M5 45 70mS M6 45 75mS M8 40 90mS Out of the box metering update rates are based on factory default configuration data and are listed in Table 3 10 for all PM3000 model and communication options Factory default settings for configuration parameters can be found in Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 31 Table 3 10 Meter update rate with factory default configuration Model Communication option 000 232 ENT RIO CNT DNT M4 60 mS 65 mS M5 60 mS 65 mS M6 65 mS 70 mS M8 80 mS 85 mS Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 32 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Chapter 4 Configuring Communications Communications The communications features of the Powermonitor 3000 make it uniquely suited to integrate electric power usage information into your industrial control and information systems Every Powermonitor 3000 is equipped with a native RS 485 communications port and you can select optional c
139. emand reactive power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 10 1 e Average demand reactive power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 107 Load factor reactive power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 to 100 0 e Peak demand apparent power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 10 1 e Average demand apparent power expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 107 Load factor apparent power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 to 100 0 e Peak demand current expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 107 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 18 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 e Average demand current expressed in VARs Range 0 0 to 999 9 1071 e Load factor current expressed in per cent Range 0 0 to 100 0 e Elapsed time hours that have elapsed since the last automatic or manual clear reset operation e Ending date for this load factor record Range 0 to 123199 mmddyy 0 if the selected record is blank Advanced Features 8 19 Transient Detection Metering and Capture Transient detection functionality available only in the M8 model continuously monitors your choice of voltage or current inputs for the occurrence of a transient Transients such as voltage spikes and momentary dropouts can disrupt equipment connected to the power source but can be difficult to detect Use communications to configure transient capture parameters and retrieve the data for display and or processing Th
140. en Bradley DF1 half duplex slave protocol which is supported by a number of Rockwell Automation and third party products Please refer to publication 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual for further information Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 26 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The RS 485 communications standard supports multi drop communications between a master station and up to 31 slaves on a single network up to 1219 meters 4000 feet long For satisfactory communications performance however we recommend connecting no more than 8 to 12 Powermonitor 3000 units to an RS 485 multi drop network The optional RS 232 communications port has several configuration settings that support the use of modems for point to point and point to multipoint communications You may select Hardware Handshaking CTS RTS and adjust the Delay parameter to match your choice of modem hardware Please refer to Configuring Optional RS 232 Communications for detailed information on these settings The Powermonitor 3000 does not initiate messages nor does it support modem dial out capabilities The Powermonitor 3000 serial ports do not support DF1 full duplex communications or Data Highway 485 DH 485 communications The network master device must be configured as a DF1 polling master All devices on the network must be set to the same baud rate The node addresses of the Powermonitor 3000 units mus
141. ent Type Event Command Code Shown by DM Number Status Input Cleared s offi 7 Status Input Number 1 2 kWh Counter Set Wh Set 8 1 kVARh Counter Set Varh Set 8 2 kVAh Counter Set kVAh Set 8 3 Ah Counter Set kAh Set 8 4 All Energy Counters Set All Power Set 8 5 Trend Log Clear Trend Clr 8 6 Min Max Log Set M M Clr 8 7 Factory Defaults Restored FactCfg 8 8 Status Input Counter 1 Cleared S1 Clr 8 9 Status Input Counter 2 Cleared S2 Clr 8 10 Reserved for Future Enhancement 11 Single Setpoint Timer Clear Single SP Set 12 All Setpoint Timers Clear All SP Set 13 Power Up Pwr On 9 0 Power Down Pwr Off 10 0 Self test Error ST ggl 1 Hexadecimal Status Error Code See Table 7 2 Time Set TimeSet 12 0 Device Reconfigured New Cfg 13 0 Setpoint Reconfigured Set Cfg 14 0 NVRAM Set NVRAM Set 15 0 Transient Detected TRN Det 16 M8 only User Text 17 M8 only 1 Number indicates a numeric digit Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 4 Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table 7 2 Status Error Codes Bits Hex Description bit 0 0001h Master Module code flash status bit 1 0002h Master Module data flash status bit 2 0004h Master Module RAM Status bit 3 0008h Reserved for factory use bit 4 0010h Master Module NVRAM status bit 5 0020h Master Module data acquisition status bit 6 0040h Master Module real time clock status bit 7 0080h Reserved
142. ents for the M6 and M8 11 The Oscillograph results and Transient capture results tables are 29 elements for DeviceNet and 59 elements for all other communication protocols 12 Supported only on 1404 xxxxx ENT xx Series B modules Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 4 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 2 Remote 1 0 DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet 1 0 Messaging CSP File No N A Remote 1 0 BT N A g CIP Assy Inst 1 Read 2 Write No of Elements 2 Default l User Configurable Yes DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet Data Type Integer Selectable as Floating Point with DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Remote 1 0 Discrete Data Provided by Powermonitor Remote 1 0 Input Data Element Element name Range Comment No 1 Relay KYZ and alarm bits Bit Description 00 07 Reserved used internally for BT information 08 Form C relay state setpoint output flag 1 0 De energized amp not forced 1 Energized amp not forced 09 KYZ output state setpoint output flag 2 0 De energized amp not forced 1 Energized amp not forced Setpoint output flag 3 state Setpoint output flag 4 state Setpoint output flag 5 state Setpoint output flag 7 state 0 1 2 13 Setpoint output flag 6 state 14 5 Setpoint output flag 8 state 2 Status input bits Bit
143. er All of the configuration data must be downloaded to the scanner module Select the Save to SDN button download All Records and allow the scanner to reset Afterwards the DeviceNet Scanner displays an 80 followed by a 00 when everything is configured properly Input parameters for Powermonitor 3000 are Instance 1 and output parameters are Instance 2 gt Communications 4 13 H 1747 SDN Scanner Module 3 Download Scanlist from Scanner Optional Ethernet Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in ENT are equipped with an optional Ethernet 10BaseT communication port and a native RS 485 port in a dual port configuration that allows simultaneous operation of the ports You must configure the communications parameters before you connect your Powermonitor 3000 to an Ethernet network Use the Display Module under the PROGRAM gt OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS menu See your Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 14 Communications network administrator for assistance in setting the communications options Configuration parameters include e IP Internet Protocol address e Subnet Mask e Gateway IP address Keep alive Time Series A only e Protocol Select Series A only The IP Address uniquely identifies your Powermonitor 3000 on the network You configure the unit s IP address the way it is most commonly expressed as four decimal numbers connected by decimal points aa
144. er Factor L3 Displacement Power Factor 3 phase Displacement PF L1 Distortion Power Factor L2 Distortion Power Factor L3 Distortion Power Factor s s s a m i i i ai a cy CO N 9 oO A co N gt o o CO NI 9a OFF By GC NI o 3 phase Distortion PF Refer to Table A 13 Metering Power Factor Results 120 KWh forward Refer to Table A 14 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results 21 KWh reverse 22 Kwh net 23 KVAh 124 KVARh forward Refer to Table A 15 Metering Reactive Energy and Amp Hour Results 125 KVARh reverse 126 KVARh net 27 KAh Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 68 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Param Parameter name No 128 Bulletin number 129 Series 130 Overall status 131 ASIC status 132 Data FLASH status 33 Real time clock status 34 RTC NVRAM status 35 Option comm status 136 Display module status 137 Watchdog status 138 VCO lock status 139 Reserved 40 Application FRN 141 Boot code FRN 142 ASIC FRN 143 Option comm FRN 44 Display module FRN 45 Reserved 46 Digital board revision 147 Analog board revision 148 Option comm board revision 149 Reserved 50 MM Device ID 151 MM RAM type 152 Display module type 153 Option comm type 154 Reserved Comment Refer to Table A 16 Selftest Diagnostic
145. er than the Setpoint Release Delay Figure 5 1 Over Forward Setpoint Operation Parameter Value A lt Setpoint Action Delay mae Setpoint High Limit P Aa gt Setpoint Action Delay lt Setpoint gt Setpoint flee Delay Release Delay Setpoint Low Limit aaa 0 Time s Setpoint Activated Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Setpoint Low Limit Setpoint High Limit Parameter Value Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 3 Over Reverse Setpoint An over reverse setpoint is the mirror image of an over forward setpoint For reverse setpoints all the magnitudes and limits are negative An over reverse setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type increases beyond the Setpoint High Limit in the negative direction and remains over the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and stays below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Figure 5 2 Over Reverse Setpoint Operation Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Time s gt JA lt Setpoint gt Setpoint gt Setpoint Action Delay Release Delay Release Delay Y lt Setpoint Action Delay Under Forward Setpoint An under forward setpoint is similar to an over forward setpoint except the Setpoint High Limit and the S
146. erforming a table write to Table A 33 Harmonic Analysis Configuration Read Back Select This read write table of 9 integer elements comprises the following configuration parameters e Password needed to enable or disable harmonic analysis or write the maximum short circuit and demand current parameters Not needed for read back select use 1 Default 0000 e Channel Specifies the channel of harmonic data to obtain in the next read of Table 33 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 13 7 I4 8 avg of voltage channels 9 avg of current channels On a read indicates the last selection made Default 1 Read back mode selects read back mode for Table A 34 Range 0 to 1 default 0 See below The remaining elements listed below are reserved in the M4 and M5 models return 0 on a read and must gt be 0 on a write Individual harmonic data type selects distortion 0 or magnitude 1 on subsequent reads of the individual results tables Default 0 e Enable disable harmonic analysis 0 disables 1 enables calculation of TIF K factor IEEE 519 and individual harmonics results Default 1 IEEE 519 maximum short circuit current used for IEEE 519 pass fail calculation expressed in integer exponent format Range 0 to 9999 integer 4 to 21 exponent defaults are 0 Advanced Features 8 11 IEEE 519 maximum demand load current used for IEEE 519 TDD calculation expressed in integer exponent format Range 0
147. ers in the user comment string e Event record internal identifier 1 creates a new event 0 32767 selects the corresponding event record to write see below e Timestamp of user entered event Text character pair data see below The Event record internal identifier value between 0 and 32767 selects the corresponding existing event A read of Table A 27 returns the Event log internal identifier in element 1 and the Event text available flag in element 17 Each Text character pair element in the table contains two characters expressed in ASCII standard coding On a write Text character pair data will be written into the specified Block number for the event record unless a user comment already exists for the selected record You may calculate the position of the characters in the user comment as follows Text Block 1 26 Text Character Pair Example the value 3345 hex in character pair 2 block 2 corresponds to 3 and E in character positions 28 and 29 in the user comment string Reading a User Comment using communications You read a User Comment using a variation of the indexed read method Typically a client reads the Event Log and when it finds the Event text available flag set in the results table runs a routine to read the user comment Two writes to and two reads of Table A 50 Event Log Text are needed to read the entire user comment The first write contains these elements Publicatio
148. es Refer to Reading Data from the Trend Log on page 7 12 CSP File No F27 Remote 1 0 BT 28 CIP Assy Inst 31 No of Elements 11 User Configurable No Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Parameter being returned 1 to 73 1 MIN value for parameter 999 9x102 to 999 9x102 2 MAX value for parameter 999 9x102 to 999 9x102 3 MIN timestamp year 1998 to 2097 4 month day 0101 to 1231 5 e 0000 to 2359 6 0000 to 5999 7 MAX timestamp year 1998 to 2097 8 month day 0101 to 1231 g se 0000 to 2359 10 0000 to 5999 A 35 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 36 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 26 Event Log Configuration Read Back Record Select CSP File No N28 Remote 1 0 BT 9 CIP Assy Inst 32 Write 33 Read No of Elements 6 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Applies to Table 27 Event log results Table 49 Event log text Element No 0 Password Element name Default Value 0 to 9999 0 Comment Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 DeviceNet unique write identifier 32768 to 32767 Oo Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 4 33 Read back mode 0 to6 2
149. essage Control MG 0 Setup Screen This example reads the Voltage Current and Frequency table File F15 from the Powermonitor 3000 MSG MG9 100 1 Elements lead Notice that when using an unscheduled message directly to the Powermonitor 3000 in this case node 4 that the message format is local multi hop selection is no The following selection performs a write operation to the basic configuration table F10 of the Powermonitor 3000 Insert a MSG Instruction to the ladder rung and assign a control MSG Read Write Message Control MG 0 Setup Screen This example writes configuration to the Basic Configuration table File F10 in the Powermonitor 3000 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 50 Communications MSG MG9 0 1 Elements PLC 5 Typed Write 8 This message transfers 9 floats from table F8 0 to the Powermonitor 3000 table F10 The Powermonitor 3000 address is at node 4 local message Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 51 How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters Using Communications You may clear or preset the energy counters by performing a table write to Table A 14 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results or Table A 15 Metering Reactive Energy and Amp Hour Results These read write tables each contain 22 integer elements as follows e Password required to clear or preset an energy counter returns 1 e Parameter select bitfield used to sel
150. et websites e http www ab com networks whatnew html ethernet e http www ietf cnri reston va us e http www standards ieee org catalog olis lanman html e http www controlnet org For additional information on the TCP IP protocol networking in general and EtherNet IP please see these publications e Comer Douglas E Internetworking with TCP IP Volume 1 Protocols and Architecture Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs NJ 1990 ISBN 0 13 468505 9 e Tenenbaum Andrew S Computer Networks gna Edition Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs NJ 1989 ISBN 0 13 162959 X ControlNet Specifications ControlNet International Ltd Clearwater FL 2001 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 44 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 ControlNet Communications Option Powermonitor 3000 ControlNet units support a Class 1 connection to Instance 1 and 2 To utilize this scheduled connection to a ControlLogix controller open the controller program offline in RSLogix 5000 Select the ControlNet bridge module 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR in the I O configuration Add the Powermonitor 3000 as a Generic ControlNet module Figure 4 15 shows a typical configuration Figure 4 15 ControlNet Configuration Type CONTROLNET MODULE Generic ControlNet Module Parent Chet r Connection Parameters Assembly f Instance Size Name PM3KeNT Input poo fet eb Description ControlNet Powermonitor 3000 aj Output 2 2
151. etering Sequence Voltage and Current Results 4 Current unbalance 5 Neutral current 6 W Refer to Table A 11 Metering Power Results 7 VAR 8 VA 9 Total true PF Refer to Table A 13 Metering Power Factor Results 10 Total disp PF 11 Total dist PF 12 W demand Refer to Table A 12 Metering Demand Results 13 VAR demand 14 VA demand 15 Amp demand 16 Projected amp demand 17 Projected W Demand 18 Projected VAR Demand e 19 Projected VA Demand 20 Frequency Refer to Table A 9 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result 21 Phase rotation Refer to Table A 10 Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results 22 Crest factor voltage Refer to Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More 23 Crest factor current 24 Crest factor 14 25 IEEE THD voltage G 26 IEEE THD current 27 IEEE THD 14 28 IEC THD voltage 29 IEC THD current 30 IEC THD 14 31 Status input 1 Refer to Table A 3 Discrete Data 32 Status input 2 33 Any status input y Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 27 Param Parameter name M4 M M Comment No M5 6 8 34 Setpoint 1 time accumulator Refer to Table A 20 Setpoint Output Actions 35 Setpoint 2 time accumulator eje 36 Setpoint 3 time accumulator o 37 Setpoint 4 tim
152. etpoint Low Limit are reversed An under forward setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and remains below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored increases above the Setpoint High Limit and stays above the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 4 Setpoint Programming and Operation Parameter Value Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit Parameter Value y Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Figure 5 3 Under Forward Setpoint Operation gt Setpoint lt Setpoint Release Delay Release Delay an gt Setpoint Action Delay B Time s Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Under Reverse Setpoint An under reverse setpoint is the mirror image of an under forward setpoint The magnitude and all limits are negative numbers An under reverse setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit in the negative direction and remains below the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored increases above the Setpoint High Limi
153. eturn all zeroes Advanced Features 8 17 Reading the Load Factor Log To select the read back mode or record an auto reset store day of the month or issuing a manual reset store command perform a table write to Table A 41 This read write table contains 6 integer elements as follow e Password required for changing the auto clear reset day or manual clear reset command Use 1 if only selecting read back mode or record Range 0000 to 9999 default 0000 Returns 1 e Record select selects the next read back record e Read back mode 0 auto increment record number after each read 1 manual increment Auto increment not supported in DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communications e Manual clear reset command 0 do nothing 1 manual clear reset command see above Auto clear reset day Selects the day of month for automatically storing and clearing the current in process record Range 0 to 31 0 disables automatic clear reset 1 to 28 selects day of month 29 to 31 selects last day of month e Reserved reserved element must be 0 on a write returns 0 The results table is Table A 42 You may read the in process Record 0 or one of the 12 logged records This table contains the following 14 floating point elements e Peak demand power expressed in watts Range 0 0 to 999 9 107 e Average demand power expressed in watts Range 0 0 to 999 9 1071 Load factor power expressed in per cent Range 0 0 to 100 0 e Peak d
154. etwork Access Port NVS Non Volatile Storage EtherNet IP Open Device Vendor s Association s Ethernet Industrial Protocol PT Potential Transformer Also known as VT in some countries PM 3000 Powermonitor 3000 Master Module PLC Programmable Logic Controller RFI Radio Frequency Interference RAM Random Access Memory RTOS Real Time Operating System R 1 0 Remote Input Output PCCC Rockwell Automation s proprietary Programmable Controller Communications Commands protocol RMS Root mean square SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SPDT Single Pole Double Throw SLC Small Logic Controller trrbl Task Request Response Block used by RTOS for inter task communication UL Underwriters Laboratories VA Volt ampere VAR Volt ampere Reactive Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Preface 4 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Safety Considerations Safety Chapter 1 Before installing and using this product please read and understand the following precautions ATTENTION A ATTENTION A IMPORTANT Only qualified personnel following accepted safety procedures should install wire and service the Powermonitor 3000 and its associated components Before beginning any work disconnect all sources of power and verify that they are de energized and locked out Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Never open a cur
155. for readback select returns 1 1 Setpoint number 1 to 10 M4 M5 Refer to Writing Setpoint Configuration Using 1 to 20 M6 M8 Communications on page 5 11 2 Read back mode 0 to1 0 3 Setpoint type 0 to 52 g t 4 Evaluation condition 0to5 0 5 High limit 0 to 9999 Depends Integer on 0 setpoint type 6 High limit Exponent 4 to 21 0 7 Low limit 0 to 9999 0 Integer 8 Low Limit Exponent 4 to 21 0 9 Action delay 0 3600 M4 M5 Seconds 0 0 30000 M6 M8 M4 M5 1 Sec M6 M8 10 Release delay 0 3600 M4 M5 Seconds 0 0 30000 M6 M8 M4 M5 1 Sec M6 M8 11 Output action 0 to 32 M4 M5 of 0 to 43 M6 M8 2 Status 0 to 1 0 3 Accumulated time 0 to 9999 Seconds Integer 4 Accumulated time 1 to 21 Exponent 15 Clear time accumulator Oto 1 0 command 1 On the M6 and M8 setpoint 19 and 20 default to detect voltage sag and voltage swell See Sag and Swell page 8 13 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 26 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 19 List of Setpoint Types Applies to Refer to Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status PM3000 Type See table Param Parameter name M4 Comment No M5 0 Not used Disables the setpoint 1 Voltage Refer to Table A 9 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result 2 Current 3 Voltage unbalance Refer to Table A 10 M
156. foratwo wire KYZ connection and between 2and 10 pulses per second for a three wire connection Let s use a three wire KYZ connection and a pulse rate of 4 pps 4 Computetheoutputscaleby dividingtheresultof 2 bytheresultof 3 and rounding to the nearest integer For our example we ll set the output scale to 70 1 0 Operations 6 3 Setpoint Control Set the Control source to a value of 7 to enable setpoints to control the selected output Discrete 1 0 Control Set the Control Source to a value of 8 to enable Ethernet Series B ControlNet DeviceNet or Remote I O to have exclusive control over the Powermonitor 3000 output via I O messaging Forced Operation You may over ride automatic output control by issuing a force command using the Display Module or by writing the appropriate force command parameter in the Advanced Device Configuration table Forces override all other output control sources If you force an output either energized or de energized be sure to release the force to re establish your selected control source If you cycle power to the Powermonitor 3000 all output forces are released gt No Control Operation You may also select no output control by selecting a value of zero 0 for the Control source parameter This mode enables only output forcing Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 6 4 1 0 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications Loss Behavior IMPORTA
157. g min max log and the user defined data table also return values in floating point format The Powermonitor 3000 uses the IEEE 754 32 bit floating point format that is compatible with Allen Bradley PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers Integer data type 16 bit is used in most configuration data tables and some results data tables Communications 4 19 Integer array format is used to express real reactive and apparent energy results Each of these values is expressed as an array of five integer values each scaled by a different power of ten 10 106 103 10 105 Refer to Table A 14 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results on page A 21 for additional detail Integer exponent format is used for some specific table entries such as IEEE 519 short circuit current The integer element is in the range of 0 to 999 or 9999 and a typical exponent element ranges from 4 to 21 Timestamp format The Powermonitor 3000 expresses timestamps in an array of four data table elements Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Hundredth of a second Each timestamp parameter except the Year is a combination of its first and second element For instance the Month is the parameter value divided by 100 and the remainder is the Day Example 1230 December 30th The timestamp data type may be integer or floating point and depends on the data table Other common data table elements The Powermonitor 3000 uses several common data table elements in a number
158. g event Range 0 to 100 per cent default 90 e Reserved must be zero 0 on a write returns 0 Capture clear status Read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers are clear Bit 0 LSB corresponds to capture 1 bit 1 to capture 2 and so on For each bit 1 indicates clear 0 indicates not clear Capture ready status read only bitfield that indicates which capture numbers contain captures that are ready to read Same bit correspondence as above For each bit 1 indicates the capture is ready 0 indicates no capture or not yet ready If a client reads a capture that is not ready 1 is returned for all data points Block Number The block number and the total number of data reads required to read an entire capture depend on the communications option and the capture type See Table 8 1 The block number range is 1 to the number of Data reads required listed in the table Table 8 1 Capture Type Properties Advanced Features 8 3 Capture Type The properties associated with the capture type options are listed in Table 8 1 You may select a capture type that best suits your application requirements A higher sample rate provides a more accurate representation of the waveform when higher order harmonics and transients are present Higher data resolution provides more accuracy of each data point Capture type 5 combines low sampling rate and low resolution but captures almost 7 seconds of waveform at 60 Hz
159. gency Load Shedding Monitoring power usage to preserve system stability in the event of sudden utility outage e Power System Control Managing system voltage harmonic distortion and power factor The Powermonitor 3000 is a sophisticated modern alternative to traditional electromechanical metering devices A single Powermonitor 3000 can replace many individual transducers and meters The Powermonitor 3000 is simple to install configure and operate and provides you with accurate information in a compact economical package Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 2 Product Description Master Module Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The Master Module contains the main microprocessor based monitoring functions including terminations for power system connections status inputs control outputs a native RS 485 communications port and a port for the Display Module Configuration Although the Powermonitor 3000 ships from the factory with default settings you need to configure it for your particular requirements You may configure the Powermonitor 3000 using the optional Display Module Alternately you may use an external device or application to write configuration operational parameters and commands to the Master Module through its native or optional communications port Optional external applications that you may use for Powermonitor 3000 configuration include RSPower32 and RSEnergyMetrix software ope
160. ger Statistics The trigger source and capture identifier are combined in one element and indicate what triggered the capture and a unique capture identifier or serial number The value divided by 1 000 gives the trigger source 0 none 1 to 20 setpoint number 21 native communications 22 optional communications The remainder of this calculation is the unique capture identifier which increments by 1 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 6 Advanced Features Harmonic Analysis Table 8 2 Harmonic Analysis Functionality from 0 to 999 and rolls back to 0 A client application may use the identifier to associate with an event log entry and determine chronological order of captures Example a parameter value of 15347 indicates that setpoint 15 triggered the capture and its serial number or identifier is 347 The trigger position returns the number of the data point corresponding with the time the capture was triggered A client application may use this to place a marker on the displayed waveform The maximum trigger position is the same as the total number of oscillogram data points The Powermonitor 3000 configuration may affect the accuracy of the trigger position statistic with respect to the pre trigger setting For best results set RMS resolution to 0 Nominal and RMS results averaging to 0 none in Table A 6 Advanced Device Configuration The capture timestamp and capture type are also important statistics that ident
161. gh a series of menus for configuration commands and data display The Display Module is shipped with a 3 meter 10 ft long shielded 4 pair cable that provides power and serial communications between the Master Module and the Display Module The Display Module fits into a standard ANSI 4 inch analog meter cutout for panel mounting Only one Display Module may connect to a Master Module although you may use one Display Module to configure and monitor any number of Master Modules one at a time Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 4 Product Description Performance Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The Powermonitor 3000 is available in four basic models designated M4 M5 M6 and M8 Each model offers specific functionality as indicated in the table below The M5 model offers M4 functionality and can be field upgraded to an M6 or M8 model for an additional charge Table 2 1 Product Features of Powermonitor 3000 Module M4 M5 M6 M8 Master Module Features e je e Voltage current power measurements and display e je Compatible with PLC 5 SLC 500 and ControlLogix e je Compatible with RSLinx RSPower32 RSEnergyMetrix and RSView32 e je Output control via control relays or PLC e o e Demo mode for training e je 10 user configurable setpoints e je Discrete condition monitoring via status inputs e je Electronic KYZ pulse output
162. guration 25 Number of Demand Periods 26 Predicted Demand Type 27 KYZ Pulse Output Parameter 28 KYZ Pulse Output Scale 29 KYZ Pulse Output Width 30 Relay Pulse Output Parameter 31 Relay Pulse Output Scale 32 Relay Pulse Output Width 33 RMS Resolution 34 RMS result averaging 35 Frequency averaging 36 Default relay state in event of communications loss 37 Default KYZ state in event of communications loss 38 DM text scroll rate 39 Protocol Refer to Table A 7 Native Communication Configuration 40 Delay 41 Baud rate 42 Device address 43 Data format Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 66 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Param Parameter name Comment No 44 Comm parameter 1 Refer to Table A 8 Optional Communication Configuration 45 Comm parameter 2 46 Comm parameter 3 47 Comm parameter 4 48 Comm parameter 5 49 Comm parameter 6 50 Comm parameter 7 51 Comm parameter 8 52 Comm parameter 9 53 Comm parameter 10 54 Comm parameter 11 55 Comm parameter 12 56 Comm parameter 13 57 Comm parameter 14 58 Comm parameter 15 59 Comm parameter 16 60 Comm parameter 17 61 Comm parameter 18 62 Comm parameter 19 63 L1 Current Refer to Table A 9 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result 64 L2 Current 65 L3 Current 66 Avg Current 67 L1 N Voltage 68 L2 N Volt
163. h Net Crest Fact Amps L3 VARS L3 kVAh Net TEN Amps 3Ph Ave Tot React Pwr kAh Net FI Amps Neutral VALI Demand Amps IEEE 519 DD Volts L1 L2 VA L2 Demand Amps Max EEE 519 P F Volts L2 L3 VAL3 Demand Watts Amps L1 Unbal Current VA Ave 3 Ph IEC THD L3 V Volts L1 L3 Tot App Pwr Demand Watts Max Amps L2 Pos Seq Volts Demand IEC THD L4 I Volts 3Ph Ave L L True PF L1 Demand VAR Amps L3 Neg Seq Volts Demand W Crest Factor L1 V Frequency True PF L2 Demand VAR Max Average Amps Unbal Volts Demand VAR Crest Factor L1 Phase Rotation True PF L3 Demand VA Volts L1 N Average Frequency Demand VA Crest Factor L2 V Volts Pos Seq Tot True PF Demand VA Max Volts L2 N Watts L1 Projected Demand Crest Factor L2 Volts Neg Seq Displ PF L1 Projected Demand Volts L3 N Watts L2 Projected Demand W Crest Factor L3 V Amps Pos Seq Displ PF L2 Projected Demand W Volts Ave L N Watts L3 Projected Demand VAR IE Crest Factor L3 Amps Neg Seq Displ PF L3 Projected Demand VAR Volts L1 L2 Watts Ave3Ph Projected Demand VA Crest Factor L4 Voltage Unbalance Tot Displ PF Projected Demand VA Volts L2 L3 VARS L1 True PF L1 Current Unbalance Dist PF L1 Load Factor Volts L1 L3 VARS L2 True PF L2 Dist PF L2 Load Factor W Volts Ave L L VARS L3 True PF L3 Dist PF L3 Load Factor VAR Freq VAR Ave 3 Ph Total True PF Tot Dist PF Load Factor VA Amps N VA L1 Disp PF L1 Pos Seq Current VA L2 Disp PF L2 Neg Seq Current VA L3 Disp PF L3
164. h result e je 4 Clear setpoint 19 time 20 Clear kVAh result e je 42 Clear setpoint 20 time 21 Clear Ah result e je 43 Capture oscillograph Examples of Setpoint Operation Let us look again at the setpoint applications mentioned at the beginning of this chapter ATTENTION These examples are intended to demonstrate setpoint configuration only They should not be used as sample application programming references Carefully consider all control operational and safety issues when designing and implementing setpoint operations Example 1 Simple demand management To configure setpoint 1 to energize output relay 1 when projected demand exceeds 100 kW for more than one second and de energize relay 1 when projected demand falls below 90 kW for more than two seconds you could use the following settings Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 10 Setpoint Programming and Operation Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Setpoint number Setpoint type 17 Projected Watt Demand Setpoint evaluation condition 0 Over forward Setpoint high limit 100 000 watts Setpoint low limit 90 000 watts Setpoint action delay second M4 M5 10 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint release delay N seconds M4 M5 20 tenths of a second M6 M8 Setpoint action type 1 Energize relay 1 and set alarm flag 1 Ex
165. harges are based on peak demand over a utility specified time interval not on the instantaneous demand or connected load at any given moment Typical demand intervals are 15 20 and 30 minutes frequency The number of recurrences of a periodic phenomenon in a unit of time In electrical terms frequency is specified as so many Hertz Hz where one Hz equals one cycle per second horsepower hp A unit of power or the capacity of a mechanism to do work It is equivalent to raising 33 000 pounds one foot in one minute One horsepower equals 746 watts impedance The total opposition i e resistance and reactance a circuit offers to the flow of alternating current at a given frequency It is measured in ohms Glossary 3 induction motor An alternating current motor in which the primary winding usually the stator is connected to the power source and induces a current into a secondary usually the rotor inductor A device consisting of one or more windings with or without a magnetic core Motors are largely inductive initiator pulses Electrical impulses generated by pulse initiator mechanisms installed in utility revenue meters Each pulse indicates the consumption of a specific number of watts These pulses can be used to measure energy consumption and demand lagging current The current flowing in an AC circuit which is mostly inductive If a circuit contains only inductance the current lags the applied voltage
166. hat it is the desired record and adds it into the target data structure 3 The client repeats steps 1 and 2 until all the desired data is read Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 24 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Figure 4 3 Indexed Data Read Manual Mode Flow Diagram Personal Computer Application Powermonitor 3000 Data Client Data Server Large data structure e g log oscillogram etc Readback select controls index pointer to large data structure Password or 1 Element 0 Segment or Channel 1 Data selects Segment 3 Readback Source Location Select Table Initiates Data Read Segment or Channel 1 Results Table Client verifies correct data segment or channel Large data structure e g log oscillogram etc Refer to Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation Chapter 7 Data Logging and Chapter 8 Advanced Features for details of indexed mode data reads for each of these functions Data Messaging Application Considerations Communications 4 25 1 0 Type Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with optional Remote I O EtherNet IP Series B and DeviceNet communications provide I O type messaging Remote I O units emulate a logical quarter rack on the I O channel The corresponding two word output and input image table elements are automatically scanned by the I O scanner and the data points they co
167. he impact of an event on your plant or process 18 External Demand Sync Timeout The demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync 19 Comm Card Reset An unexpected comm card condition has been detected and the master module has reset the comm card in an attempt to resume normal operation Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 30 User Configured Table Setup Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 39 CSP File No N30 Remote 1 0 BT 35 CIP Assy Inst 35 Write 36 Read No of Elements 26 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Applies to Table A 31 User Configured Table Results Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration returns 1 1 DF1 File No 31 31 Refer to User Configured Data Table on page 4 51 Ethernet CSP File No Series A 31 31 only RIO BT No 62 62 DeviceNet Ass y Inst 1 37 37 EtherNet IP CIP Ass y Inst 1 37 37 2 DeviceNet instance 1 data type 0 to 1 0 3 Selection for parameter 1 0 to 301 71 L1 L2 V 4 Selection for parameter 2 72 L2 L3 V 5 Selection for parameter 3 73 L3 L1 V 6 Selection for parameter 4 63 11 7 Selection for parameter 5 64 12 8 Selection for parameter 6 65 13 9 Selection f
168. heir applicability to various models and communications options Please note carefully these designations Table A 1 summarizes the purpose and general attributes of each data table and lists each data table s access method read only or read write addressing options number of elements and Powermonitor 3000 model applicability Table A 2 through Table A 54 provide comprehensive details of the individual data tables along with application notes For your convenience summary information from Table A 1 is repeated at the top of each individual table Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 2 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 1 Summary of Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables for all Communications Options Data Table Name and Description lo Applies to es BS E a8 Loos gij s 28 25 5 E S o S 3 ot EY ZEA a xs lo z2 amp 2 Z glgzsS 2b RESE S S SE Remote 0 DeviceNet EtherNet IP and R W 1 0 1 2 3 e je o 4 ControlNet I O Messaging Discrete Data R N9 10 3 6 e je je Basic Device Configuration R W F10 20 4 5 Borge Je je jo Date and Time R W N11 12 6 7 8 e je je Advanced Device Configuration R W N12 26 8 9 26 e je je Native Communication Configuration R W N13 11 10 1 6 e je je Optional Communication Configuration R W N14 24 2 1 20 e je je Metering Voltage Current and Frequency R F15 38 14 14 e je je Result
169. icate with this port Error checking method is CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check All devices on the RS 485 network must be set at the same data rate The native communications port does not support Data Highway 485 DH 485 communications Although DH 485 uses the RS 485 physical media its D gt protocol is not compatible with the DF1 protocol Communications 4 3 Table 4 1 Native Communication Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Protocol DF1 DF1 Half Duplex Half Duplex Slave Slave Delay Time between receiving 0 to 75 mS 10 mS a request and transmitting a response Baud Rate RS 485 port 1200 baud 9600 baud communications bit rate 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud RS 485 Uniquely identifies the 1 to 254 Unit ID number Address Powermonitor device on a multi drop network Data Format Data bits Stop bits 8 1 none 8 1 none Parity 8 1 even Optional RS 232 Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in 232 are equipped with an optional RS 232 serial port in addition to the native port These units are set up at the factory to communicate using the optional port using the Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave protocol The configuration parameters are e Protocol Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave e Data rate Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 baud Default 9600 e Delay Range 0 to 75 mS 10 mS default N
170. ics are additionally weighted to reflect the relationship of harmonic frequency and degree of coupling to the phone lines These weights are called single frequency TIF weights The 1404 M6 uses the most recent TIF weights updated in 1960 The single frequency factors are used to compute the total TIF The user multiplies the TIF numbers by the RMS magnitude of the power lines voltage or current to obtain an index for estimating the amount of interfering energy that is coupled to the telephone system The formula for total TIF is Where TIF e X single frequency RMS current or voltage at harmonic 7 e w single frequency TIF weighting factor at harmonic i K Factor K Factor measures additional heating in a power transformer due to the harmonics in the power signal These harmonics cause additional heating due to increased core losses that occur at higher frequencies The increased losses are related to the square of the harmonic frequency Therefore a slight harmonic content can significantly increase the heat rise in a power transformer The additional harmonic heating may cause a transformer to exceed designed temperature limits even though the RMS current is less than the transformer rating The K Factor is used as justification to oversize a power transformer to allow extra margin for harmonic losses or to select an appropriate K Factor rated transformer A K Factor rated transformer is the preferred choice since it has known perf
171. ield Communications on page 4 51 2 KWh forward x 109 999 to 999 kWh 3 x 108 4 H x 10 5 x 10 6 x 10 7 KWh reverse x 10 999 to 999 8 x 108 9 x 10 10 x 10 11 x 10 12 Kwh net x 10 999 to 999 13 x 10 14 x 10 15 x 10 16 x 10 17 KVAh x109 999 to 999 KVAh 18 x 10 19 x 10 20 x 10 21 44 x 108 22 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 22 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 15 Metering Reactive Energy and Amp Hour Results CSP File No N21 Remote 1 0 BT 30 CIP Assy Inst 21 Write 22 Read No of Elements 23 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required to clear or preset energy counters Returns 1 1 Parameter select 0to7 Refer to How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters Using 7 KVARh forward x 102 999 to 999 KVARh Communications on page 4 51 3 x 10 4 H x 10 5 x 10 6 x 10 7 KVARh reverse x 109 999 to 999 8 x 10 9 x 10 10 x 10 11 x103 12 KVARh net x 10 999 to 999 13 x 10 14 x 10 15 x 10 16 A x 10 17 KAh x 19
172. ify the capture and enable a client application to correctly display the waveform The Powermonitor 3000 provides harmonic data to help you understand this important element of power quality in your facility Each model provides a different level of harmonic information Table 8 2 provides an overview of the harmonic analysis available in each model You may access all harmonic data using communications The Display Module can access average values of the parameters as indicated in the DM column Harmonic data DM M4 M6 M8 Per Per Avg of Avg of Avg M5 current voltage current voltage channel channel channels channels IEEE Total Harmonic Distortion THD e e e e IEC Distortion Index DIN e e e e e e e Crest Factor e e e e e Telephone Interference Factor TIF e e e e K factor e e e JEEE 519 Total Demand Distortion TDD IEEE 519 Pass Fail e e e Harmonic distortion harmonics 1 to 41 e e e Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table 8 2 Harmonic Analysis Functionality Advanced Features 8 7 Harmonic data DM M4 M6 M8 Per Per Avg of Avg of Avg M5 current voltage current voltage channel channel channels_ channels Harmonic magnitude harmonics 1 to 41 e e Harmonic distortion harmonics 42 to 63 e Harmonic magnitude harmonics 42 to 63 e IEEE THD an
173. imal Reset 05 05 Get_Attribute_Single OE 14 Set_Attribute_Single 10 16 Allocate_Group_2_ldentifier_Set 4B 75 Release_Group_2_lIdentifier_Set AC 76 DeviceNet Object Classes The Powermonitor 3000 supports the following DeviceNet object classes Table 4 8 DeviceNet Object Classes Class hex Object 01 Identity 02 Message Router 03 DeviceNet 04 Assembly 05 Connection 2B Acknowledge handler Indexed Data Table Reads using DeviceNet Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet communications support only manual indexed mode for reading large data structures such as oscillograms setpoint status logs and harmonics Refer to the appropriate sections of this manual for detailed information DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier The communications interface used in the DeviceNet communications option is programmed to reject duplicate write messages Because of this all writeable data tables in the Powermonitor 3000 include an element called DeviceNet unique write identifier In many cases your client application may ignore this element because the message data is unique However where your client application performs repeated identical writes it should increment the DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier with each new message An example of this would be reading the Event Log or Trend Log Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 34 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003
174. ime stamped records of important power system occurrences that can be aligned with corresponding production or environmental effects to better understand and optimize your energy use and costs This chapter describes in detail the data logging functions in the Powermonitor 3000 The Event Log contains records stored in nonvolatile memory of the 50 M4 and M5 or 100 M6 and M8 most recent events that occurred in the Powermonitor 3000 Event records may include e Changes in the unit configuration e Setpoint activation and release Relay or KYZ output forcing Status input change of state e Power up and power down e Clearing or presetting of an energy counter e Setting the unit time and date e Clearing of the trend or min max log e Clearing of setpoint timers e Detection of a sag swell or transient Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 2 Data Logging Table 7 1 Event Codes Event Log Configuration Options There are two options in the Event Log setup e You may choose to log or ignore ignore is default status input change of state You may make this configuration setting using the Display Module by navigating through these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt EVENT LOG and setting the Log Status Inputs parameter from No to Yes You may also make this selection using communications e You may choose to log or ignore Jog is default changes to the date and time setting You may make this selection on
175. ince this message write 8 INT elements the message length is 16 bytes RSLinx DDE OPC and Microsoft Excel You may create a simple data transfer application using RSLinx direct data exchange DDE capabilities and a DDE client such as Microsoft Excel This example uses DDE to read and write the value of the Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 12 Sample Applications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 real time clock in a Powermonitor 3000 You may utilize similar techniques to transfer data to and from any Powermonitor 3000 data tables Setting up a DDE topic in RSLinx Follow these steps to create a DDE topic in RSLinx You will need RSLinx OEM Professional Gateway or SDK to support DDE communications 1 Establish communications between RSLinx and your Powermonitor using the communications method of your choice The example uses the native DF1 communications port 2 In RSLinx select DDE OPC from the main menu DDE OPC Topic Configuration DF1_1404_123 a Linx Gateways Ethemet 4 g AB_ETH 1 Ethemet fs AB_MASTR 1 DF1 3 Click the New button Enter a name for the DDE OPC topic The example uses DF1_1404_123 4 Browse through the tree in the Data Source window to locate your Powermonitor 3000 Click its icon to select it Sample Applications C 13 DDE OPC Topic Configuration Lins Gateways Ethernet AB_ETH 1 Ethernet AB_MASTR 1 DF1 5 Click on the Data Collection tab Selec
176. ing New Password 1 to 9999 0000 Demand Period Length 99 to 99 15 Number of Demand Periods 1 to 15 1 Forced Demand Delay 0 to 900 Seconds 10 Predicted Demand Type Instantaneous Instantaneous 1st Order 2nd Order KYZ Control Source 0 None 5 Vah 7 Setpoint 1 Wh Forward 6 Ah 2 Wh Reverse 7 Setpoint 3 VARh Forward 8 Comms 4 VARh Reverse KYZ Pulse Output Scale 1 to 30000 10 KYZ Pulse Output Width 0 40 to 2000 0 Relay Control Source Same as KYZ 7 Setpoint Relay Pulse Output Scale 1 to 30000 10 5 Relay Pulse Output Width 0 40 to 2000 100 E RMS Resolution Nominal High High RMS Averaging On Off On 8 Frequency Averaging On Off On S Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY Date Year 1998 to 2097 1998 Date Month 1 to 12 1 Date Day 1 to 31 1 Time Hour 0 to 23 0 Time Minutes 0 to 59 0 Time Seconds 0 to 59 0 Default relay state on comms loss 0 Last state resume 2 De energize resume 0 Default KYZ state on comms loss 1 Last state freeze 3 De energize freeze 0 Wdog action 0 Halt 0 Halt 1 Continue Display Module Scroll Speed Fast Slow Fast Energy counter rollover point 4 to 15 digits 15 Metering Result Set M8 only 0 All results 0 All results 1 Transducer mode 2 Energy meter mode 1 Available with Master Module firmware V2 34 or greater 2 Metering result set parameter may only be configured using communications 3 Fac ory default for RMS Resolution is Nomin
177. instantaneous demand computes the time remaining in the interval and performs a first order projection of what the final demand will be at the end of the interval This method may be useful where your system has a significant base load with additional loads that are switched in and out during the interval Second Order Projection The second order demand projection begins with the first order projection It computes the rate of change of the first order trend computes the time remaining in the interval and performs a second order projection of what the final demand will be at the end of the interval This method may be useful where your power system has little or no base load and a load profile that increases over the duration of the interval A second order projection is more sensitive to rapid load changes than the other methods Range Units Kilo Watt Hours Reverse The total real power produced Kilo Watt Hours Net The sum of forward and reverse power Kilo VAR Hours Forward The total reactive power consumed 0 to 1 0x1012 kVARh Kilo VAR Hours Reverse The total reactive power produced Kilo VAR Hours Net The sum of forward and reverse reactive power Kilo VA Hours Net The total apparent power consumed 0 to 1 0x1012 kVAh Amp Hours Net Accumulated amp hours consumed 0 to 1 0x1012 Ah Demand Current The calculated demand for average current 0 to 999 9x1021 Amps Max Demand Current The ma
178. int elements contains the following metering results and capture statistics e Capture number transient capture number associated with the metering results Range 1 to 6 Cycle number which cycle in the capture is returned in this read Range 1 to 12 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 22 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Voltage three RMS voltage results that express line to line delta wiring modes or line to neutral all other wiring modes for the current Cycle number Range 0 0 to 999 0 107 e Current four RMS current results L1 L2 L3 L4 for the current Cycle number Range 0 0 to 999 0 107 e Trigger channel indicates which channel caused the transient capture 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 13 7 14 Index at trigger the value of the transient index at the time of the capture Range 999 0 10 to 999 0 10 Voltage and Current trigger thresholds at the time of the transient capture Range 0 0 to 999 0 10 Capture ID unique identifier that increments by 1s to 30 000 and then rolls over to 0 Read this data table using an indexed read method Select the Read back Mode Capture and Cycle by writing to Table A 43 Reading Transient Capture Data The data client sets up the read back configuration with a table write to Table A 45 Transient Capture Clear Read Back Data Select This read write table of 13 integer elements contains the following
179. integer file The message header consists of 6 words organized as follows Message Word High byte Low byte Header 0 Transmit ID Command 1 Port Size 2 Service MAC ID Body 3 Class 4 Instance 5 Attribute 6 Data to write if applicable 7 n Word O contains a transmit identifier TXID and command byte Assign each explicit message a unique TXID in the range of 0 to 255 decimal 0 to FF hex The TXID is used to identify the response to this message request Valid command codes are e 1 hex Execute transaction block Use this command first to start the explicit message e 4 hex Delete transaction from response queue Use this command after you copy the response from the scanner to remove the response from the scanner and enable further explicit messages Word 1 contains the DeviceNet scanner port number and the transaction body size in bytes The SLC 500 scanner uses only port 0 a PLC 5 DeviceNet scanner has two ports 0 and 1 For a read request the transaction body size is 3 words see table above therefore 6 bytes For a write the body size is the data size in bytes plus the 6 byte path class instance attribute Word 2 contains the DeviceNet service code and the MAC ID or node number of the server device in this case the Powermonitor 3000 Valid service codes for use on Class 4 assembly instances are e OE hex 14 decimal Get_Attribute_Single Requests a read of the entire
180. ion Optional Remote I O communications provides two words of status input and two words of relay command output Address these words as if they were discrete inputs and outputs represented by the logical rack and group address of the Powermonitor 3000 See Table A 2 on page A 4 for details Use block transfers to obtain the remaining Powermonitor 3000 data When programming a block transfer address the logical rack and group address to specify the Powermonitor 3000 and select the block transfer length to specify the data table On a block transfer read the Powermonitor 3000 returns the selected data table buffered with elements of value 0 to make up the block transfer length On a write the source data must contain zero value buffer elements to make up the correct length You may use the block transfer done or error status bit as a condition for the next block transfer message without any additional programmed delay When using Remote I O pass through communications you may need to limit the number of Powermonitor 3000 units on a channel due to the programmable controller s pass through capacity Refer to the appropriate controller documentation for additional information on pass through communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 28 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications DeviceNet Communications Option The Powermonitor 3000 with optional DeviceNet communications operates as a slave devi
181. ion 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 12 Metering Demand Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 19 CSP File No F18 Remote 1 0 BT 25 CIP Assy Inst 17 No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Units Range Comment No 0 Demand Current Amps 0 0 to 999 9x102 Refer to Energy Results on page 3 8 A 1 Demand Power Watts 0 0 to 999 9x102 W 2 Demand Reactive Power VAR 0 0 to 999 9x102 3 Demand Apparent Power VA 0 0 to 999 9x102 4 Projected Demand Amps 0 0 to 999 9x102 Refer to Projected Demand Calculation on page 3 10 5 Projected Demand W Watts 0 0 to 999 9x102 6 Projected Demand VAR VAR 0 0 to 999 9x102 7 Projected Demand VA VA 0 0 to 999 9x102 8 Elapsed demand period time Minutes 9 9 to 999 9x102 The time elapsed within the current demand period 9 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 20 Table A 13 Metering Power Factor Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F19 Remote 1 0 BT 33 CIP Assy Inst 18 No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Elemen
182. ion Parameters as shown for the default configuration If you change the configuration of the input assembly instance enter its new size in Instance 1 here Select 3 as the Configuration instance and leave its Size set to 0 bytes the Series B Powermonitor 3000 does not support a Class 1 configuration connection Click the Next gt button Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 42 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Figure 4 12 Requested Packet Interval Setup Requested Packet Interval RPI 100 64ms 1 0 3200 0 ms T Inhibit Module I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault cmo coat ve re Set the Requested Packet Interval to 100 mS or greater The Powermonitor 3000 will not respond reliably to an RPI of less than 100 mS The Powermonitor 3000 data will be found in controller tags as shown in Figure 4 13 Figure 4 13 Powermonitor 3000 1 0 Tags My PM3000 C font Riera AB ETHERNET_ My_PM3000 fone Maar AB ETHERNET_ My_PM3000 1 Data flagel Decimal INT 6 My_PM3000 1 D ata 0 0 Decimal INT H My_PM3000 1 Data 1 0 Decimal INT E My_PM3000 1 Datal2 0 Decimal INT My_PM30001l Datal3 o Decimal INT My_PM3000 1 Data 4 0 Decimal INT My_PM3000 1 Data 5 0 Decimal INT My_PM3000 0 api Mages AB ETHERNET_ My_PM3000 0 Data Gane
183. ion condition 0to5 10 e e Setpoint level integer 0 to 9999 11 e je exponent 27 to 21 2 e e Setpoint action release delay 0 to 3600 M4 M5 0 to 30000 M6 M8 3 e e Setpoint action 0 to 32 M4 M5 0 to 43 M6 M8 4 e e Sustain limit timer integer 0 to 9999 15 oe le exponent 4 9 71 16 e e Capture identifier 0 to 999 17 e Event Text Available 0to1 Refer to Event Log User Comment Field M8 only on page 7 6 Table A 28 Status Error Codes Bits Hex Description bit 0 0001h Master Module code flash status bit 1 0002h Master Module data flash status bit 2 0004h Master Module RAM Status bit 3 0008h Reserved for factory use bit 4 0010h Master Module NVRAM status bit 5 0020h Master Module data acquisition status bit 6 0040h Master Module real time clock status bit 7 0080h Reserved for factory use bit 8 0100h Reserved for factory use bit 9 0200h Display Module status bit 10 0400h Master Module watchdog timer status bit 11 0800h Master Module optional communications status bit 12 15 1000h 8000h Reserved for factory use Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 38 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 29 List of Event Types Applies to Table A 27 Event Log Results PM3000 Type See table Event M4 Event type Event Command Comment Code M5 Code 0 e No event 0 The log starts with no events record
184. ion table Demand Period Synchronization You may synchronize the Powermonitor 3000 demand period with a utility end of interval EOD pulse by wiring a dry contact controlled by the EOI pulse into Status Input 2 and setting the appropriate demand configuration parameters Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about demand Setpoint Inputs You may use one or both status inputs to activate setpoint control Use an equal or not equal setpoint evaluation condition with status inputs Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 6 6 1 0 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Event Logging of Status Inputs You may choose whether or not to record status input transitions in the Event Log If you were using a status input to read a KYZ meter pulse for example recording transitions into the Event Log would quickly fill the log and overwrite potentially important event information On the other hand you may use the status input to detect a discrete condition that you want logged Refer to Event Log Configuration Options on page 7 2 Event Log Chapter Data Logging Its inherent data logging capability makes the Powermonitor 3000 a versatile component in a number of power and energy applications Cost allocation applications can read billing variables like energy usage and demand from the configurable Trend Log making the accuracy of reports less dependent on a continuous network connection The Event Log captures t
185. iption 2 5 In addition to the native RS 485 communications port several factory installed communications options are also available These options make is possible for a user to select Powermonitor 3000 units to provide power and energy information into a variety of existing or new control systems and communications networks Each communications option supports bi directional data transfer with external devices or applications Metering measurement logging configuration and status data may be accessed via communications Communications options are set in the Master Module You may configure communications using the Display Module or via communications to an external application such as RSPower32 or RSEnergyMetrix Refer to the information later in this manual on configuration and operation of the communications options Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Manual publication 1404 IN007 for installation and wiring information related to your selected communications options The last 3 characters of the catalog number specify the communications option of the Powermonitor 3000 RS 485 Native Communications A catalog number ending in 000 specifies a Powermonitor 3000 equipped with only a native RS 485 communications port with the following performance features e Baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 e RS 485 cable length 1219 m 4000 ft at 19 200 baud maximum e Cable type 2 wire shielded Belden 9841 e Multi drop
186. is typical of the highest historical peak demand depending on which is largest It is designed to compensate the electric utility for maintaining equipment not fully utilized reactance The opposition to the flow of alternating current Capacitive reactance is the opposition offered by capacitors and inductive reactance is the opposition offered by an inductive load Both reactances are measured in ohms real power The component of apparent power that represents real work in an alternating current circuit It is expressed in watts and is equal to the apparent power times the power factor resistance The property of a substance which impedes current flow and results in the dissipation of power in the form of heat The unit of resistance is the ohm One ohm is the resistance through which a difference of potential of one volt will produce a current of one ampere revenue meter A meter used by a utility to generate billing information Many types of meters fall in this category depending on the rate structure root mean square RMS The effective value of alternating current or voltage The RMS values of voltage and current can be used for the accurate computation of power in watts The RMS value is the same value as if continuous direct current were applied to a pure resistance sliding demand interval A method of calculating average demand by averaging the average demand over several successive short time intervals advanci
187. ith the circuit whose voltage is to be measured or controlled PT s are normally used to step down high voltage potentials to lower levels acceptable to measuring instruments Also known as voltage transformer VT potential transformer ratio The ratio of primary voltage divided by secondary voltage power factor The ratio of real power in watts of an alternating current circuit to the apparent power in volt amperes Also expressed as the cosine of the phase angle between the fundamental voltage applied to a load and the current passing through it power factor correction Steps taken to raise the power factor by closely aligning the current to be in phase with the applied voltage Most frequently this consists of added capacitance to increase the lagging power factor of inductive circuits power factor penalty The charge utilities impose for operating at power factor below some rate schedule specified level This level ranges from a lagging power factor of 0 80 to unity There are innumerable ways by which utilities calculate power factor penalties Glossary 5 ratchet clause A rate schedule clause which states that billing demand may be based on current month peak demand or on historical peak demand depending on relative magnitude Usually the historical period is the past eleven months although it can be for the life of the contract Billing demand is either the current month peak demand or some percentage 75 percent
188. its only oduie Level 1 Display Program Program Password Level 2 Program Program Commands Configuration Level 3 Network Demand Time Input Mode Broadcast Port Time IP Byte 1 Time IP Byte 2 Time IP Byte 3 Time IP Byte 4 World Time Zone Time Interval Hrs Table 8 3 Network Demand Sync and Time Configuration Parameter Range Default User Setting Network Input Mode 0 Master Command Message Input M_CMD 3 Demand Time 1 Master Status 2 Input M_ST2 2 Slave Broadcast Message Input S_BCM 3 Slave Status 2 Input S_ST2 Broadcast Port 300 to 400 Server Port Number 300 Number Time IP Byte 1 0 to 255 IP Address 0 Time IP Byte 2 0 to 255 IP Address 0 Time IP Byte 3 0 to 255 IP Address 0 Time IP Byte 4 0 to 255 IP Address 0 World Time Zone 12 to 12 Hours from UTC or GMT 0 Time Interval 0 to 32766 Seconds between Server Requestss 60 Seconds Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Appendix A Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables This section provides the detailed data table definitions you may use for setting up communications with a Powermonitor 3000 One set of data tables covers all the Powermonitor 3000 models M4 M5 M6 and M8 and communications options 000 232 RIO DNT ENT and CNT The individual tables include notes regarding t
189. j instantaneous value of the voltage or current data point M max rms Max rms magnitude 399 0 line to neutral volts for channels 1 3 and 5 691 1 line to line volts for channels 1 3 and 5 10 6 amperes for channels 2 4 6 and 7 Rmax Maximum resolution 8192 for 13 bit w sign N PT or CT ratio PT or CT primary PT or CT secondary Maata Value of the data point from Table A 46 For example consider the following capture Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Advanced Features 8 25 e PT primary 13 8 kV e PT secondary 120 V e CT primary 100 A e CT secondary 5 A Delta voltage mode line to line You would multiply each data point by the following factor to correctly display the waveform actor 691 1 1 414 8192 13800 120 13 7 Capture Statistics The Capture timestamp and Capture identifier are important statistics that identify the capture A data client may use the Capture identifier to associate the transient capture with corresponding metering data and event log data Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 26 Advanced Features Network Demand Synchronization Ethernet Series B only Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Clear Command Issue the Clear command parameter to clear transient captures from non volatile memory and provide space for new captures Write the correct Password for the Powermonitor 3000 to accept the command The command parameter options ar
190. k slave device e Three baud rates 57 6k 115 2k 230 4k e Cable lengths up to 3048 meters 10 000 feet e Node capacity up to 32 nodes e Update rates for discrete I O 5 mSec e Update rates for block transfers 50 mSec minimum e Two discrete inputs e Eleven discrete outputs e Read Write block transfer data tables for access to all data Product Description 2 7 DeviceNet Optional Communications A catalog number ending in DNT specifies a Powermonitor 3000 with a DeviceNet port in addition to the native RS 485 port The DeviceNet option permits concurrent use of both communications ports The DeviceNet port has the following performance features e Adapter class device e Four baud settings 125k 250k 500k and AutoBaud e Remotely settable baud rate e Cable length up to 500 meters maximum e Node capacity up to 64 nodes including master e Remotely settable node address Shielded twisted pair media containing both signal and power conductors e Update rates for I O channel 100 mSec minimum e Update rates for explicit messaging 250 mSec minimum e Configurable I O channel assembly instance six parameters default twenty three maximum e Configurable explicit assembly instance seventeen parameters default twenty three parameters maximum e Explicit assembly instances for access to all data e Two I O assembly instances e May be reset remotely through Identity Object Support for up to four concurrent clients
191. l and consists of 10 integer elements as follows e Password A valid password is required Meter result set O calculates all metering results default 1 is transducer mode 2 is energy meter mode Reserved elements The remaining elements must be 0 Transducer mode The Powermonitor 3000 calculates only volts amperes watts VARs VA true power factor per phase and total and frequency Energy meter mode The unit calculates only average voltage average amperes total watts frequency and net kWh Date and Time You may use these parameters to set the Powermonitor 3000 s internal clock and calendar and configure the display format as MM DD YYYY default or DD MM YYYY The Powermonitor 3000 uses its internal clock time stamp entries in logs oscillograms and transient captures Display Mode Scroll Speed This parameter controls how fast text that doesn t fit in the window is scrolled on the Display Module Default is fast scrolling Watchdog Timeout Action Configure this parameter to determine how the Powermonitor 3000 responds if an internal watchdog timeout has occurred This may occur due to extreme environmental condition or internal operational error Choices are e Halt Restart the firmware log an event stop metering and disable all functionality except Display Module and communications Continue Restart the firmware log an event and resume operation Default is Halt This parameter is avai
192. l criteria e The length of the source data array must equal the data table length Note that the same data table may have a different length in various Powermonitor 3000 models e The entire data table must be written in one pass e The first element in the source data array must generally contain the correct password or a value of 1 for read back data selection e The source and destination data type must match e g floating point or integer Each element of the source data array must be within the legal range listed in the data table specification Reserved elements must be the correct value usually 0 e For DeviceNet optional communications only each consecutive write must be unique You may read the Write Error Status table after writing to a data table to verify that the write was valid and accepted by the Powermonitor 3000 If there was an error in the last write the Write Error Status will indicate the CSP file or assembly instance DeviceNet only number and the offending element number You may write data to the Powermonitor 3000 for basic and advanced device configuration to set the time and date to set up setpoints logs oscillography and transient analysis and to select records to be read back from indexed data reads such as harmonics oscillography and logs Figure 4 1 Data Table Write Flow Diagram Programmable Controller Data Client Source Location Initiates Data Re
193. l write the Success flag is set The message configuration for writing the new configuration table to the Powermonitor 3000 is shown below Note the instance name is the lower of the two values given in Table A 1 Service code 10 hex is for a write Set_attribute_single Table C 2 ControlLogix Tags Used Sample Applications C 27 Tag Name Type of Description Table Elems msgReadOld MESSAGE N A Read Existing Config N30 msgWriteNew MESSAGE N A Write New Config N30 msgGetStatus MESSAGE N A Write Status N32 Start BOOL 1 Start Operation Failed BOOL Failure Flag Success BOOL Success Flag Oneshot_1 BOOL One shot Oneshot_2 BOOL One shot Timer1 TIMER Inter message Delay Timer2 TIMER PM3000 Reset Time Counter1 COUNTER Message Retry Default INT 26 Default Configuration Custom INT 26 Custom Configuration Old INT 26 Previous Config Download INT 26 New Config to Write Pwd INT 1 PM3000 Password Status INT 2 Write Status Select INT 1 User Selection The user must enter data into the Default and Custom tags Refer to User Configured Data Table on page 4 51 for the structure and rules for the User Configured Table Setup data table and its default settings See Table A 54 on page A 64 for parameters which may be included in the User Configured Table Setup IMPORTANT Words 0 through 3 of the User Configurable Table Setup a
194. lable in only in firmware versions 2 xx and greater Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 29 Default Output Behavior on Communications Loss Refer to Communications Loss Behavior on page 6 4 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 30 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Metering Update Rate Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The metering update rate is a measure of how often the PM3000 calculates new metering results The metering update rate is not significant in most applications but can be important in some control applications The metering update rate affects how quickly a setpoint can respond to an electrical event and affects how often new metering results are available for communications The metering update rate is dependent on the PM3000 model and device configuration Table 3 8 contains information that can be used to calculate the metering update rate for a specific model containing specific configuration selections Table 3 8 Metering update rate calculation based on model and device configuration Model and config options M4 M5 M_ MB Update rato Base metering update rate e je o 45mS If device is an M4 Add 10mS If RMS Resolution High see table A 6 e e e je Add 10mS If catalog contains ENT CNT or DNT e je o Add5mS If the Min Max log is enabled see table A 23 e e e e Add 5mS If more than 5 setpoints are configured e je o Add5mS If Oscillography is enabled s
195. le write to Table A 21 with the desired configuration settings This read write data table contains 26 integer elements including e Password Required to configure logging you may use 1 for read back selection e DeviceNet unique write identifier Read back mode See below must be a valid entry even if read back is not being selected at this time e Logging interval Interval in seconds 1 to 3 600 0 disables logging but does not disable setpoint triggered logging 1 synchronizes logging with demand interval e Logging mode 0 selects overwrite mode 1 selects fill and hold e Clear log command O takes no action 1 clears the trend log e Parameter selections You may select up to 16 parameters from the list in Table A 54 to be logged An entry of 0 selects no parameter only parameters preceding the first 0 in the table will be logged e Reserved elements Must be 0 Total records logged These read only elements are ignored during a write Although you may configure up to 16 Trend Log parameters on units with optional DeviceNet gt communications the results table will return only the first 8 The Powermonitor 3000 clears the trend log when you change any parameter or the logging interval You may perform a simple table read of Table A 21 to view the existing Trend Log configuration When you read this table the password element returns a value of 1 and the reserved and command elements return a value of 0 Elements
196. lement name Range Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 8 11 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0to1 2 Reserved 0 3 24 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 4 4 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 5 6 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 6 8 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 7 ot Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 8 2 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 g 14 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 10 6 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 11 8 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 12 20 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x107 13 FFT iteration 0 to 32767 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 38 Harmonic Results Even Harmonics 22 to 40 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables CSP File No F38 Remote 1 0 BT 42 CIP Assy Inst 45 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No A 47 Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Element Elementname Rane Comment No 0 Channel returned 1to7 Refer to Reading Harmonic Analysis Data on page 8 11 1 Type of harmonic data returned 0to1 2 Reserved 0 3 22 d Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 4 24h Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 5 26 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x10 2 6 28 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 7 30t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x10 2 8 32 4 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 3 34th Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 10 36 Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 11 38t Harmonic 0 0 to 999 9x1022 12 40 Harmonic 0 0 to
197. ly using communications These choices provide you with the flexibility to ignore routine occurrences thereby increasing the time that important events are stored For example a status input may count pulses from a water or gas meter Or the unit may be connected to an energy logging system such as RSEnergyMetrix that synchronizes the time every night at midnight In either case important events would likely be overwritten by routine nuisance events Viewing the Event Log Using the Display Module You may view the entries in the Event Log by navigating through DISP gt LOGS gt EVENT LOG The event number shows up in the top line and in the bottom line an event description followed by the event time stamp scrolls across the display Table 7 1 lists the event codes as shown on the Display Module Event Type Name Event Type Event Type Event Command Code Shown by DM Number No Event No Evnt 0 0 Setpoint Activated Sete eal 1 Setpoint Number 1 10 Setpoint Deactivated Sett D 2 Setpoint Number 1 10 Relay Forced Energized Riy F1 3 Relay Number 1 2 Relay Forced De energized Riy Fo 4 Relay Number 1 2 Relay No Force Option Riy NF 5 Relay Number 1 2 Status Input Set S Onl 6 Status Input Number 1 2 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table 7 1 Event Codes Data Logging 7 3 Event Type Name Event Type Ev
198. mand The utility may provide a pulse that indicates the end of each demand interval The utility updates the demand value at the end of each interval and maintains the highest value obtained during any interval Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 10 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 This method is known as thermal demand You may set up a Powermonitor 3000 to determine its demand interval from the utility pulse To accomplish this connect the utility pulse to status input 2 and make the appropriate settings in the Advanced Device Configuration If the utility does not provide a demand interval pulse you won t be able to synchronize with the utility to control your demand In this case you may use the sliding window method This method breaks the demand interval into many sub intervals and updates the demand value at the end of each sub interval For example a five minute interval might be divided into five one minute sub intervals The demand for each one minute interval is calculated and at the end of five minutes the average value of the sub intervals is computed to obtain a demand value At the end of the sixth minute the value for sub interval one is discarded and a new demand value computed based on sub intervals two through six In this way a new five minute demand value is obtained every minute The maximum value is then maintained as the peak demand This method approximates
199. max log Oto 1 1 4 Clear min max log 0to1 0 5 Timestamp of last min max clear year 1998 to 2097 6 A 0101 to 1231 7 Se 0000 to 2359 8 0000 to 5999 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 24 Min Max Log Parameter List Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 33 Applies to Table 23 Min max log config read back select Table 25 Min max log results PM3000 Type All Param Parameter name Comment No 0 L1 Current Refer to Table A 9 Metering Voltage Current and Frequency Result 1 L2 Current 2 L3 Current 3 Avg Current 4 L1 N Voltage 5 L2 N Voltage 6 L3 N Voltage 7 Avg L N Voltage 8 L1 L2 Voltage 9 L2 L3 Voltage 0 L3 L1 Voltage 1 Avg L L Voltage 12 Frequency last cycle 13 L4 Current Refer to Table A 10 Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results 14 Positive Sequence Current 5 Negative Sequence Current 6 Current unbalance 17 Positive Sequence Voltage 18 Negative Sequence Voltage 19 Voltage unbalance 20 Average frequency 21 L1 Real Power Refer to Table A 11 Metering Power Results 22 L2 Real Power 23 L3 Real Power 24 Total Real Power 25 L1 Reactive Power 26 L2 Reactive Power 27 L3 Reactive Power 28 Total Reactive Power 29 L1 Apparent Power 30 L2 Apparent Power 31 L3 Apparent Power 32 Total Apparent Power Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 34 Powermonito
200. me 237 Setpoint 3 accumulated active time 238 Setpoint 4 accumulated active time 239 Setpoint 5 accumulated active time 240 Setpoint 6 accumulated active time Comment Refer to Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 71 Param Parameter name Comment No 241 Setpoint 7 accumulated active time Refer to Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status 242 Setpoint 8 accumulated active time 243 Setpoint 9 accumulated active time 244 Setpoint 10 accumulated active time 245 Logging interval Refer to Table A 21 Trend Log Configuration Read Back Record Select 246 Logging mode 247 Total records logged 248 Trend log param 1 249 Trend log param 2 250 Trend log param 3 251 Trend log param 4 252 Trend log param 5 253 Trend log param 6 254 Trend log param 7 255 Trend log param 8 256 Trend log param 9 257 Trend log param 10 258 Trend log param 11 259 Trend log param 12 260 Trend log param 13 261 Trend log param 14 262 Trend log param 15 263 Trend log param 16 264 Enable disable Min max log Refer to Table A 23 Min Max Log Configuration Read Back Select 265 Timestamp of last min max clear year 266 Timestamp of last min max clear Month day 267 Timestamp of last min max clear Hour min 268 Timestamp of last min max
201. metering accuracy options date time and Display Module scrolling rate To perform advanced configuration using the Display Module navigate through these menus PROG gt PASS gt CONFIGURATION gt ADVANCED Password The password protects the unit against unauthorized commands or configuration changes Be sure to write down the new password and keep it in a safe place Range 0 to 9999 default 0000 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 24 Powermonitor 3000 Operations p gt Table 3 7 Device Configurations Summary If you forget or lose your password contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance Refer to Rockwell Automation Support in the front of this manual Parameter Range Default User Setting Wiring Mode 0 Delta 3 CT 5 Open Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 1 Delta 2 CT 6 Wye 2 Direct Delta 3 CT 7 Single Phase 3 Direct Delta 2 CT 8 Demo 4 Open Delta 3 CT PT Primary T to 10 000 000 480 PT Secondary 1 to 600 480 amp CT Primary 1 to 10 000 000 5 2 CT Secondary 1 to 5 5 ca 4 Primary 1 to 10 000 000 5 14 Secondary 1to5 5 Nominal System Voltage 1 to 10 000 000 480 M6 and M8 only Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 25 Table 3 7 Device Configurations Summary Parameter Range Default User Sett
202. mmunications catalog numbers ending in CNT LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition CHAN A and Off No power or Channel disabled pens Steady Red Faulted unit Alternating Self test red green Alternating red off Incorrect node configuration Steady green Normal operation Flashing green off Temporary errors or node is not configured to go on line Flashing red off Media fault or no other nodes present on network Flashing red green Incorrect network configuration Status Steady Green Normal operation Flashing green red Communication card power up self test Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 14 Product Description Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Metering Functionality Chapter 3 Powermonitor 3000 Operations The Powermonitor 3000 is a microprocessor based electrical power and energy measuring device It connects to the user s three phase or single phase AC power system directly or through instrument transformers PTs and CTs It converts instantaneous voltage and current values to digital values and uses the resulting digital values in calculations of voltage current power energy etc You may access the resulting metering values manually using the Display Module or automatically using communications with an external device or application The basic operations of the Powermonitor 3000 include the following e Metering functionality e Operational and
203. mode Edit Mode Cancels changes to the parameter restores the existing value and returns to Program mode Increments the parameter menu value Decrements the parameter value Saves the parameter change to the Master Module and returns to Program mode Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 14 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Figure 3 2 Menu Parameter Structure Chart Key Default 4 Screen Default q Level 1 amp Y Screen ie M Ri Next Item 4 p Within Current Level A us r i D Level 1 A q Leve 3 a 4 Display Program z Ru Previous Item i 4l Level4 y e Within Current Level Program L Password Level 2 Display Display Display Metering Harmonics Logs Level 3 el Meteng Metering Harmonics Event Min Max V LF Power E Power 4 L1 L2 L3 N01 Log Log Level 4 Event Most Recent Volts L1 N Watts L1 kW Hours Forward IEE THD V vent n Volts L2 N Watts L2 kW Hours Reverse JEEE oTHD Volts L3 N Watts L3 kW Hours Net EC AHD V Volts 3Ph Ave L N Total Power kVARh Forward IEC THD E it 01 Amps L1 VARS L1 KVARh Reverse Crest Fact V ven daer Amps L2 VARS L2 KVAR
204. mode voltage drop for correct operation Some legacy Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet communications do no support remotely settable node addressing AutoBaud or Program gt Baud You can check whether your Powermonitor 3000 supports these functions by viewing the Optional Communications Card status using your Display Module Communications type 81 will not support these functions type 88 will You may also view this status item by a read of assembly instance 23 element 25 Communications 4 7 Table 4 4 Optional DeviceNet Communications Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Node DeviceNet node 0 to 64 decimal 63 Address number MAC ID Baud Rate DeviceNet 0 125 Kbaud 0 125 Kbaud Communications 1 250 Kbaud Rate 2 500 Kbaud 3 Autobaud 4 Program Baud Bus off Specifies response 0 Hold CAN 0 Hold in Reset Interrupt toa CAN bus off chip in reset interrupt 1 Reset CAN chip and continue Configuring the Powermonitor 3000 using RSNetworx for DeviceNet gt DeviceNet is an open standard multi vendor communications network Although other vendors offer DeviceNet configuration tools all examples in this manual will depict the use of Rockwell Software RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 1 Launch RSNetWorx Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 8 Communications DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Barcode Scanner Communicati
205. monitor 3000 Display Module Installation Instructions 1404 IN005 Bulletin 1403 Powermonitor II Tutorial 1403 1 0 2 Bulletin 1403 Powermonitor Il Instruction Sheet 1403 5 0 Cat No 1403 NSC Smart Communications Card Instruction Sheet 1403 5 1 Cat No 1403 NENET Ethernet Communications Card Instruction Sheet 1403 INO05 Cat No 1403 NDNET DeviceNet Communications Card Instruction Sheet 1403 IN054 Cat No 1402 LSM Installation and Operation Manual 1402 5 0 Cat No 1407 CGCM User Manual 1407 UM001 Cat No 9307 RSPower32 Cat No 9307 RSEnergyMetrix Terms and Conventions Preface 3 In this manual the following terms and conventions are used Abbreviation Term AWG American Wire Gage BSD Berkeley Sockets Distribution BIR Block Transfer Read BIW Block Transfer Write CSA Canadian Standards Association CIP Control and Information Protocol CNET ControlNet Industrial Control Network CT Current Transformer DC Daughter Card DM Display Module DPRAM Dual Port RAM EMI Electromagnetic Interference EOI Rockwell Automation s Flectronic Operator Interface group HTML Hyper Text Markup Language ID Identification 1 0 Inputs and Outputs IEC International Electrotechnical Commission LED Light Emitting Diode LSM Line Synchronization Module NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NAP N
206. monitor class 4 assembly instance 4 N9 6 Targets Instance number to read or write N9 7 Target Attribute Power monitor Attribute of assembly instance is 3 3 N9 8 Target member number Not used Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 34 Sample Applications Table C 5 Word Description of Function N9 9 Size of the data in words Used for writes only When performing a read operation this parameter is forced to 0 Size of Power monitor tables is type N elements x 1 type F elements x 2 N9 10 Not used by CIP_SETUP N9 11 Enables a read write operation Writing a 1 starts the process for writing an assembly instance of the power monitor Writing a 2 starts the read process of assembly instance from the power monitor Receiving Information from the SCNR Scanner Observe the sample of the CIP_SETUP file for the retrieval of VIF table assembly instance 14 of the power monitor Data File N9 dec CIP_SETUP Radi Decma z S O Desc po H Properties Usage Help After setting up the communication parameters a 2 is written to location of N9 11 The transaction is complete when bit N7 0 9 becomes true The information will be located in file F8 FLT_DATA starting at location 0 The length of usable information is the length of elements in table instance 14 VIF table of the power monitor When receiving integer information from the power monitor the data will be readable from fil
207. n you may be able to identify plant activities that caused the peak You may be able to prevent or reschedule activities or install a demand management system Either option may realize significant savings in demand charges You can use the load factor values to estimate demand cost savings potential The lower the load factor the higher the potential for savings by managing your electric power demand The Powermonitor 3000 stores the load factor in 13 records Record 0 stores in progress calculations and will be cleared on a power cycle Records 1 through 12 are a first in first out array saved in non volatile memory with the highest record number containing the most recent record In manual clear reset mode when you issue a clear reset command the contents of record 0 is written to the highest numbered record and Gif necessary the remaining records are shifted down with the oldest being deleted In auto clear reset mode you select a day of the month for this process to occur automatically Within each record the Powermonitor 3000 stores peak average and load factor values for real power watts reactive power VARs apparent power VA and average current amps Peak values are the largest such value that has occurred since the last automatic or manual clear reset occurrence The in process record record 0 is updated at the end of each demand interval If no demand interval has expired since the last unit power up the record will r
208. n 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 8 Data Logging Configurable Trend Log Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Password 1 e Write type 0 DeviceNet unique write identifier as applicable Text block 1 Event record internal identifier from Table A 27 element 1 selects record to read The remaining records may remain 0 The next read of Table A 50 returns the first 26 characters in the user comment The next write is identical except the Text block must be 2 The next read returns the last 24 characters in the user comment You can learn a great deal about and learn how to reduce your enterprise s energy costs by keeping a historical record of power and energy usage The Configurable Trend Log allows you to set up automatic logging of up to 16 parameters at intervals between 1 second and 1 hour It can store over 45 000 individual records in nonvolatile memory You must use communications to configure and read the Trend Log There is no Display Module interface for either configuration or monitoring Trend Log Modes of Operation The Trend Log operates in one of two modes e Fill and Hold record logging continues until the log is full The user must clear the log for logging to continue e Overwrite logging operates in first in first out mode whereby each new record overwrites the oldest record The trend log always contains the most recent records Default configuration As shipped from
209. n entire capture depend on the communications option The range is 1 to 70 for DeviceNet and 1 to 28 for all other communications options Read Back Mode The data client uses the indexed read method to read transient capture data The readback mode options are e Auto increment all channels successive reads of Table A 45 increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel increment through all remaining channels and wrap back to the original channel e Auto increment current channel successive reads of the results table will increment through all remaining blocks of the current channel only Manual increment each write of Table A 45 specifies the channel and block to be read in the next read of Table A 46 Successive reads of the results table return the same block of data each time if no read back select write is done As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communications support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message before each read of the results table For all other communications options auto increment all channels or auto increment current channel read back mode will provide the highest communications throughput Table A 46 comprises the transient capture results This read only table comprises 29 DeviceNet or 59 all other communications options integer elements Capture timestamp in three elements using the standard timestam
210. n page 8 17 2 Read back mode 0 to1 1 3 Clear peak reset average command 0 to 1 0 4 Auto clear reset day 0 to 31 31 5 Reserved 0 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 52 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 42 Load Factor Log Results CSP File No Remote 1 0 BT 43 CIP Assy Inst 51 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Refer to Reading the Load Factor Log on page 8 17 Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Peak Demand W 0 0 to 999 9x102 1 Average Demand W 0 0 to 999 9x102 2 Load Factor W 0 to 100 0 3 Peak Demand VAR 0 0 to 999 9x102 4 Average Demand VAR 0 0 to 999 9x102 5 Load Factor VAR 0 to 100 0 6 Peak Demand VA 0 0 to 999 9x102 7 Average Demand VA 0 0 to 999 9x102 8 Load Factor VA 0 to 100 0 9 Peak Demand 0 0 to 999 9x10 10 Average Demand 0 0 to 999 9x102 11 Load Factor 0 to 100 0 12 Elapsed time 0 0 to 999 9x102 13 Ending month day year 0 to 123199 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 43 Transient Analysis Configuration Read Back Select Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 53 CSP File No F43 Remote 1 0 BT 44 CIP Assy Inst 52 Write 53 Read No of Elements 10 User Configurable No Da
211. n the Event Log when the setpoint releases Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 2 Setpoint Programming and Operation You should assign each setpoint a unique action type If more than one setpoint are assigned an gt action type unpredictable output action may result You may read setpoint output flags in Table A 3 Discrete Data and Table A 2 Remote I O DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging You may read only the first 8 setpoint output flags in the discrete input table with optional Remote I O communications Setpoints evaluate data based on six different conditions over forward over reverse under forward under reverse equal and not equal Over and under setpoint evaluation conditions may only be used with analog values such as voltages currents power etc Reverse setpoints are typically used to monitor power and energy when on site generation is present Equal and not equal evaluation conditions are for use with discrete conditions such as phase rotation status inputs and transient detection Over Forward Setpoint An over forward setpoint activates when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored defined by the Setpoint Type increases beyond the Setpoint High Limit and remains over the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay The setpoint releases when the magnitude of the parameter being monitored decreases below the Setpoint Low Limit and stays below the limit for a time great
212. ne Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous SCANport Adapter g Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Dodge Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric BILL_MARTIN Graph 3 Read the scanner s configuration Right click on the DeviceNet scanner icon and upload the scanner s present configuration Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 11 B 1747 SDN Scanner Module 3 05 Powermonitor 3000 4 Edit the Scanner List The DeviceNet scanner needs to know how the information is coming from the Powermonitor 3000 Select the Scan List tab and move the Powermonitor 3000 into the Scanlist set Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 12 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 B 1747 SDN Scanner Module 3 21x General Module Scaniist Input Output ADR Summary At Autoap 05 Powerm Polled 8 AARI Unmap Advanced Options Memory Discrete x Start Word jo a 5 Edit the Data Table Map The DeviceNet scanner needs to know which bytes will be scanned from the Powermonitor 3000 Select the Input tab This allows the user to determine where the information is stored inside the scanner module When finished configuring select the Apply button 6 Download Configuration to the Scann
213. ng one short time interval each time Updating average demand at short time intervals gives the utility a much better measure of true demand and makes it difficult for the customer to obscure high short term loads Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Glossary 6 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 unbalanced load A situation existing in a three phase alternating current system using more than two current carrying conductors where the current is not due to uneven loading of the phases volt ampere VA The unit of apparent power It equals volts times amperes regardless of power factor volt ampere demand Where peak average demand is measured in volt amperes rather than watts The average VA during a predefined interval The highest average i e Peak VA demand is sometimes used for billing voltage V The force which causes current to flow through a conductor One volt equals the force required to produce a current flow of one ampere through a resistance of one ohm watt W A measure of real power The unit of electrical power required to do work at the rate of one joule per second It is the power expended when one ampere of direct current flows through a resistance of one ohm Equal to apparent power VA times the power factor watt demand Power during a predetermined interval The highest average i e Peak demand is commonly used for billing watt hour Whr The number of watts used in one hou
214. nications Parameter Description Range Default User Setting IP Address Unit IP address in format 0 to 255 128 1 1 Unit ID Bytes 1 to4 aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each 0 0 0 0 enables bootp byte Subnet Subnet mask in format 0 to 255 255 255 255 0 Mask Bytes aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each 1to4 byte Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 16 Communications Data Messaging Overview Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table 4 5 Optional Ethernet Communications Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Gateway IP Gateway IP address in 0 to 255 128 1 1 1 Address format aaa bbb ccc ddd decimal each Bytes 1 to 4 byte Keep Alive Used to close out inactive 0 to 3600 30 seconds Time connections seconds Protocol Selects the Ethernet O CSP CIP 0 CSP CIP Select protocol used 1 CSP only Series A 2 CIP only only Optional ControlNet Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in CNT are equipped with an optional redundant ControlNet port and a native RS 485 port in a dual port configuration that allows simultaneous operation of the ports You must configure the communications parameters before you connect the Powermonitor 3000 to a ControlNet network Use the Display Module under the PROGRAM gt OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS menu The only configuration parameter is the ControlNet node number also called MAC ID The range of
215. nly to either CSP or CSP CIP Neither a Series A Powermonitor 3000 with protocol set to CIP only not a Series B Powermonitor will respond to messages using the PCCC SCP protocol EtherNet IP CIP Protocol Allen Bradley controllers since the release of the ControlLogix platform have used the EtherNet IP or CIP protocol In particular PLC 5 and SLC 5 05 controllers at or later than the following series and revision levels support CIP communications e PLC 5 xxE Series C Rev N e PLC 5 xxE Series D Rev E e PLC 5 xxE Series E Rev D e SLC 5 05 Series A FRN 5 OS 501 e SLC 5 05 Series C Messaging from a PLC 5E or SLC 5 05 to a Powermonitor 3000 uses a MultiHop message path The client controller thinks it is communicating with a ControlLogix controller The example message detail screens below indicate a PLC 5xxE reading the voltage and current table F15 0 from a Powermonitor 3000 to the controller s F15 0 data table Figure 4 5 PLC 5 xxE Message Detail Screen Example 2 MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 This PLC 5 Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if imed out TO 0 Data Table Address F150 _ To be retried NR 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Port Number Continuous Run CO 0 Error ER 0 r Target Device Message done DN o Data Table Address Message Transmitting ST 0 MultiHop Message Enabled EN 0 r Error Error Code Hex 0 Eror Description No
216. ns Configuration parameters RMS Result Averaging RMS Resolution and Frequency Averaging allow you to make choices to fit the Powermonitor 3000 more closely to your application needs The default settings are to average 8 RMS and frequency calculations providing a smoother result and to sample at a high rate providing greater accuracy where significant harmonics are present Refer to the discussion of these parameters in Metering Functionality at the beginning of this chapter Configurable Energy Counter Rollover You may configure the number of digits range 4 to 15 at which energy values roll over to zero Configure this setting using the Display Module or by writing to Table A 6 Advanced Metering Options Some applications require very frequent updates of a limited set of metering data In the M8 model you may de select certain metering functions to improve the update rate of the Powermonitor 3000 in its remaining metering and communications functions With this feature selected de selected metering calculations return values of 0 in the appropriate data table elements Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 28 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Operations You may set the advanced metering selection only through communications by performing a table write to Table 46 Advanced metering configuration The Display Module does not support this configuration This table exists only in the M8 mode
217. nt 26 35 Oscillograph Data Point 27 36 Oscillograph Data Point 28 37 Oscillograph Data Point 29 38 Oscillograph Data Point 30 39 Oscillograph Data Point 31 40 Oscillograph Data Point 32 41 Oscillograph Data Point 33 42 Oscillograph Data Point 34 43 Oscillograph Data Point 35 44 Oscillograph Data Point 36 45 Oscillograph Data Point 37 46 Oscillograph Data Point 38 47 Oscillograph Data Point 39 48 Oscillograph Data Point 40 49 Oscillograph Data Point 41 50 Oscillograph Data Point 42 51 Oscillograph Data Point 43 52 Oscillograph Data Point 44 53 Oscillograph Data Point 45 54 Oscillograph Data Point 46 55 Oscillograph Data Point 47 56 Oscillograph Data Point 48 5 Oscillograph Data Point 49 58 Oscillograph Data Point 50 Comment DeviceNet supports only 20 data points per read Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 41 Load Factor Log Configuration Read Back Select Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 51 CSP File No N41 Remote 1 0 BT 16 CIP Assy Inst 49 Write 50 Read No of Elements 6 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M6 M8 only Applies to Table A 42 Load Factor Log Results Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration or command 1 for readback select returns 1 1 Record to read back 0 to 12 0 Refer to Reading the Load Factor Log o
218. ntain are available for use in the logic program of the controller associated with the I O scanner In DeviceNet units Instances 1 and 2 comprise the DeviceNet polled change of state or cyclic connections The default input table contains 6 integer typed elements and the output table contains two integer typed elements You may configure instance 1 Refer to the User configured I O table discussion below In EtherNet IP Series B units Instances 1 and 2 comprise the Class 1 connection As in DeviceNet units Instance 1 contains 6 integer elements of input data and Instance 2 contains 2 integer elements of output data You may configure Instance 1 Series A Ethernet units do not support a Class 1 C O connection Refer to Table A 2 Remote I O DeviceNet EtherNet IP and ControlNet I O Messaging on page A 4 for the content and format of the I O messaging data tables The Powermonitor 3000 supports a number of different communications networks and protocols Each of these has unique characteristics and methods The information in this section is provided to assist you in designing and implementing data messaging with the Powermonitor 3000 by discussing in detail the unique properties of the communications options Refer also to the Sample ladder diagrams in Appendix C Serial Communications Options The native RS 485 and optional RS 232 communications ports provide basic serial asynchronous communications capabilities They utilize the All
219. nth day Hour minute Second hundredth of a second Each timestamp parameter except the Year is a combination of its first and second element For instance the Month the parameter value divided by 100 with the remainder the Day Example 1230 December 30 Event Log User Comment Field M8 only The 1404 M8 lets you enter a user comment up to 50 characters in length into the Event Log allowing you to record the impact of an event on your plant or process You may add a user comment to an existing event or create a new time stamped event to contain a user comment Once they are first written user comments are read only The Display Module does not support entry or viewing of User Comments Writing a User Comment using communications Table A 50 Event Log Text is the interface to the user comment function Each read or write of the data table returns or writes 26 characters so it takes two reads or writes to address the entire 50 character user comment Data Logging 7 7 This read write table contains 22 integer elements including the following e Password A valid password is required to write a user comment write a value of 1 to select a record for read back Write type 0 selects a record for readback 1 selects a record for writing a new user comment prevents inadvertent creation of a user comment DeviceNet unique write identifier e Text block number 1 for the first 26 or 2 for the last 24 charact
220. o change the configuration e Table identifier a number that identifies the results table For DF1 and Ethernet PCCC CSP this is file number 31 for EtherNet IP DeviceNet and ControlNet instance 37 or 1 See User configured I O table below e Parameter selections from Table A 54 The first zero ends the list of parameters Table A 31 will return 14 elements DeviceNet units or 23 elements all other communications options containing the parameters you specified You may specify more than 14 elements in DeviceNet units but it will return only 14 The results table data is in floating point format The first zero valued element in the configuration write determines how many meaningful elements are returned in a read of the results table Refer to User Configured Data Table Setup Using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP on page C 26 for a sample ladder diagram and messages used to configure and read the user configured data table User Contigured 1 0 Table You may configure Input Messaging Instance 1 in Powermonitor 3000 units with optional DeviceNet EtherNet IP Series B or ControlNet communications in the same way as the user configured data table above You have one additional option for Instance 1 you may select the data type of Instance 1 as integer 0 or floating point 1 Theory of Setpoint Operation Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation Setpoint operation provides a method other than communications for the Powe
221. ociated with the following VBA script Sub WriteDateAndTimeQ Open DDE link RSIchan DDEInitiate RSLINX DF1_1404_123 Write data from the excel sheet into the PM3000 DDEPoke RSIchan N11 0 L8 Range Sheet1 D7 D14 Close DDE link DDETerminate RSIchan End Sub Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 16 Sample Applications Multiple Data Table Reads Using DeviceNet Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 To read the date and time from the Powermonitor 3000 click the Read graphic element To write the data and time to the Powermonitor 3000 enter the desired data and time into the worksheet along with the Powermonitor 3000 password default 0 and click the Write graphic element Date and Time Summary You may use the examples above as building blocks to create applications to meet your business needs Refer to Appendix A for detailed information on the Powermonitor 3000 data tables as well as the sections of this manual that describe the functionality you wish to include in your application Rockwell Automation also offers software products such as RSPower32 and RSEnergyMetrix that perform much of the data integration work for you Please contact your Rockwell Automation representative for more information The following is a ladder program designed to return a number real time data tables from a Powermonitor 3000 to an SLC 500 processor via DeviceNet using a DeviceNet scanner module
222. ode address Range 1 to 254 default is unit ID listed on nameplate e Data Format 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity or even parity Default no parity e Flow Control Enables or disables hardware handshaking Default disabled To change your RS 232 port configuration use the Display Module under the PROGRAM gt OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS menu The RS 232 communications standard supports point to point communications between 2 stations or nodes with a maximum cable Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 4 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 length of 15 24 meters 50 0 ft As does the native communications port the RS 232 port uses CRC error checking You may not use the optional RS 232 port and the native RS 485 port at the same time Table 4 2 Optional RS 232 Communications Configuration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting Port Select active serial port RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 Protocol DF1 Half Duplex DF1 Slave Half Duplex Slave Delay Time between receiving 0to 75 mS 10 mS a request and transmitting a response Baud Rate RS 485 port 1200 baud 9600 baud communications bit rate 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud Node Address Uniquely identifies the 1 to 254 Unit ID Powermonitor device on number a multi drop network Data Format Data bits Stop bits 8 1 none 8 1 none Parity 8 1 even Flow Control RS 232 hardware flow 0 none 0
223. of data tables These include e Password A valid password must be written to change configuration settings or issue commands For selecting records to read back you may write either a valid password or a value of 1 Default 0000 range 0000 to 9999 Record identifier The Powermonitor 3000 assigns event log records oscillography and transient captures and other items unique identification numbers These numbers typically begin at 0 increment by 1 each time a new record is created and roll over to 0 once they reach their maximum value typically 32 767 The data client may use the record identifier to associate records in different data tables or to ensure that subsequent reads contain fresh data DeviceNet unique write identifier The DeviceNet communications port on Powermonitor 3000 models so equipped will discard duplicate identical messages For that reason read back selection tables include a DeviceNet unique write identifier element The data client changes usually increments the value of this element each time it writes an otherwise identical message Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 20 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Writing Data to Data Tables The Powermonitor 3000 contains a number of writeable data tables These tables have read write access so a client may read their current content or write new content A valid write to a data table must meet the following genera
224. of operation e Display mode allows you to view Powermonitor 3000 parameters including metering setpoint min max log event log and self test information You may also select a default screen to be displayed at power up or after 30 minutes without key activity e Program mode allows you to change configuration parameters with security against unauthorized configuration changes Each Powermonitor 3000 is password protected In Program Mode the Display Module phase indicators L1 L2 L3 N flash e Edit mode allows you to modify the selected parameters In Edit mode the parameter being modified flashes and the phase indicators L1 L2 L3 N remain solid Key Functions Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 13 The Display Module has four keys located on its front bezel an Escape key Up Arrow key Down Arrow key and an Enter key These keys differ slightly in how they function in each mode See Figure 3 2 for a description of their functionality Escape Key Up Arrow Key Down Arrow Key Enter Key Display Mode Returns to parent menu Steps back to the Steps forward to the Steps into a sub menu or sets previous next parameter menu in as default screen parameter menu in the list the list Program Mode Returns to parent menu Steps back to the previous parameter menu in the list Steps forward to the next parameter menu in the list Steps into a sub menu selects the parameter to be modified or changes to Edit
225. ogram mode and display the parameter to be modified Notice the flashing phase indicators on the right hand side of the screen Figure 3 3 Edit Mode 2 Set the Display Module into Edit mode by pressing the Enter key Notice that the phase indicators on the right side turn on solid and the parameter being modified is now flashing Figure 3 4 Parameter Change Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 18 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 Change the value of the parameter by pressing the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys until the desired parameter value is displayed Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side remain solid and the parameter being modified is still flashing 4 After the desired parameter value is displayed press the Enter key to write the new value to the Master Module and set the Display Module back to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are now flashing and the parameter being modified is now solid 5 If you begin to edit the wrong parameter press the Escape key This returns the original parameter value does not modify the Master Module and returns the Display Module to Program mode Notice the phase indicators on the right hand side are flashing again and the parameter being modified is now solid Setting a Default Screen To set the current Display Module view as the default screen press the Enter key The display will read
226. oint in the oscillogram channel Nbiock the block number Natapoint_this_read the data point number 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 in the current read The total number of data points is 4600 for capture type 0 1 and 2 and 9200 for capture types 3 4 and 5 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Advanced Features 8 5 Each data point is expressed in calibrated analog to digital A D converter counts with a resolution of 8192 13 bit w sign or 128 7 bit w sign A client may calculate the primary side instantaneous voltage or current magnitude of each data point using the following formula Where e M instantaneous value of the voltage or current data point Manax rms Max rms magnitude 399 0 line to neutral volts for channels 1 3 and 5 691 1 line to line volts for channels 1 3 and 5 10 6 amperes for channels 2 4 6 and 7 Rnax Maximum resolution 8192 for 13 bit w sign capture types 0 1 and 2 128 for 7 bit w sign capture types 3 4 and 5 e N PT or CT ratio PT or CT primary PT or CT secondary Maata Value of the data point from Table 39 For example consider the following capture e PT primary 13 8 kV e PT secondary 120 V e CT primary 100 A e CT secondary 5 A e Delta voltage mode line to line e Capture type 2 You would multiply each data point by the following factor to correctly display the waveform actor 691 1 1 414 8192 13800 120 13 7 Trig
227. om the Powermonitor 3000 This example reads the Date and Time table Floats can be read by using this same process but destination file should be of type float Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read Target Device Local Remote Local Control Block N 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen Select PLC5 for your Target Device Local Network and Control Block Fill out the Setup Screen as follows Communications 4 47 MSG N7 0 14 Elements Notice that under target device that Powermonitor 3000 data table N11 Date and Time was selected The Local Node Address is the address of the Powermonitor 3000 Controlnet Node Address 4 Writing data to the Powermonitor 3000 is done with the same method It is recommended that 1 integer file and 1 float file be set aside in the SLC for use when writing to the Powermonitor 3000 Data to be written to the Powermonitor 3000 is loaded in one of these files according to data type before the transaction is started The following example writes data to the Powermonitor 3000 MSG Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write Target Device PLCS Local Remote Local Control Block N7 42 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen Select PLC5 for your Target Device Local Network and Control Block Fill out the Setup Screen as follows Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 48 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 20
228. omment Refer to Table A 18 Setpoint Setup Read Back Select and Status Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 70 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Param Parameter name No 198 Setpoint 4 action delay 199 Setpoint 5 action delay 200 Setpoint 6 action delay 201 Setpoint 7 action delay 202 Setpoint 8 action delay 203 Setpoint 9 action delay 204 Setpoint 10 action delay 205 Setpoint 1 release delay 206 Setpoint 2 release delay 207 Setpoint 3 release delay 208 Setpoint 4 release delay 209 Setpoint 5 release delay 210 Setpoint 6 release delay 211 Setpoint 7 release delay 212 Setpoint 8 release delay 213 Setpoint 9 release delay 214 Setpoint 10 release delay 215 Setpoint 1 action type 216 Setpoint 2 action type 217 Setpoint 3 action type 218 Setpoint 4 action type 219 Setpoint 5 action type 220 Setpoint 6 action type 221 Setpoint 7 action type 222 Setpoint 8 action type 223 Setpoint 9 action type 224 Setpoint 10 action type 225 Setpoint 1 status 226 Setpoint 2 status 227 Setpoint 3 status 228 Setpoint 4 status 229 Setpoint 5 status 230 Setpoint 6 status 231 Setpoint 7 status 232 Setpoint 8 status 233 Setpoint 9 status 234 Setpoint 10 status 235 Setpoint 1 accumulated active time 236 Setpoint 2 accumulated active ti
229. ommunications that facilitate seamless integration with a variety of industrial networks The optional communications choices are e Serial an RS 232 communications port that uses the Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex protocol e Remote I O allows you to connect your Powermonitor 3000 as a quarter rack to any Remote I O scanner device DeviceNet a port with standard DeviceNet functionality lets your Powermonitor 3000 integrate into an open standard multi vendor architecture e Ethernet a standard 10BaseT port allowing easy integration into factory floor and office information systems ControlNet with NAP port and two BNC connectors for connection to single or redundant media applications This chapter will cover configuration and operation of the native and optional communications ports Refer to the Installation Instructions publication 1404 IN007 for installation wiring and connection instructions The Display Module is the recommended way to configure communications on your Powermonitor 3000 If you need to review Configuration Using the Display Module on page 3 21 You may also configure communications parameters using the native or optional communications ports However because this may lead to loss of communications with the port being configured we recommend using the Display Module for initial communications configuration If you choose to configure communications parameters using communications please refer to T
230. on Adapter DeviceNet to SCANport Dodge EZLINK General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Generic Device Human Machine Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous SCANport Adapter Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Dodge Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric 2 At this point the DeviceNet scanner module does not know what device to scan Click on the Online Button to list the available devices on the network Browse for network s Linx Gateways Ethemet PRT ae H a AB_ETH 1 Ethernet Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Communications 4 9 DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet DeviceNet eS Category fH AC Drive Barcode Scanner Communication Adapter DeviceNet to SCANport Dodge EZLINK General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Generic Device Human Machine Interface Inductive Proximity Switch Limit Switch Photoelectric Sensor Rockwell Automation miscellaneous SCANport Adapter Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Dodge Rockwell Automation Electro Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric E F Ej Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 10 Communications DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet DeviceNet to SCANport Fowermonnot Dodge EZLINK General Purpose Discrete 1 0 Generic Device Human Machi
231. or Monitoring Electric Power Quality page 5 6 12 The Institute of Electrical amp Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47 Street New York NY 10017 2394 ISBN 1 55937 549 3 The Powermonitor 3000 M6 and M8 models provide a Load Factor Log which calculates and stores a group of plant demand metrics that indicates how stable or conversely how dynamic a load is over a period of time usually one month Use communications to configure load factor operation and read the results The Display Module does not support an interface to the load factor log Load factor is the average demand divided by the peak demand for the month If the load is constant load factor is 100 The Powermonitor 3000 calculate load factor for real reactive and apparent power and current and stores the last 12 results in the Load Factor Log in non volatile memory You may configure the Powermonitor 3000 to automatically calculate and store load factor on a particular day each month or you may manually generate a Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 16 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 command using communications to save the load factor result and reset the calculation You will find information useful in reducing peak demand when you look at load factor and peak demand values The peak demand period is stored in the Mix Max Log which has a date and time stamp that indicates when the peak occurred Using this informatio
232. or parameter 7 90 W 0 Selection for parameter 8 98 VA 1 Selection for parameter 9 94 VAR 2 Selection for parameter 10 111 PF 13 Selection for parameter 11 100 Dmd W 14 Selection for parameter 12 122 KWh 15 Selection for parameter 13 130 Status 6 Selection for parameter 14 14 Year 17 Selection for parameter 15 0 to 301 21 Mo Dy Parameters 15 through 23 not supported by 18 Selection for parameter 16 22 Hr min DeviceNet 19 Selection for parameter 17 23 Sec hsc 20 Selection for parameter 18 0 21 Selection for parameter 19 22 Selection for parameter 20 23 Selection for parameter 21 24 Selection for parameter 22 25 Selection for parameter 23 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 40 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 31 User Configured Table Results CSP File No F31 Remote 1 0 BT 62 CIP Assy Inst 37 No of Elements 14 DeviceNet or 23 All other communications options User Configurable Yes Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 User selected parameter 1 Parameters previously setup during a write to Table A 30 1 User selected parameter 2 2 User selected parameter 3 3 User selected parameter 4 4 User selected parameter 5 5 User selected parameter 6 6 User selected parameter 7
233. ormance in the presence of harmonics The formula for K Factor is as follows Where ine x n 4 eH magnitude of the n 2 harmonic n lt 41 or 63 H K Factor 1M g 1 a Advanced Features 8 9 IEEE 519 TDD and IEEE 519 Pass Fail IEEE 519 is the IEEE standard for Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems The 1404 M6 refers to the 1992 version of this standard IEEE 519 provides recommended limits for the level of harmonic current injection at the Point of Common Coupling PCC between the utility and the user The PCC is typically defined as the location in the power distribution system where the utility meters are connected The standard provides recommended limits for individual harmonic components as well as a limit for Total Demand Distortion TDD Total Demand Distortion is defined as the root sum square of the current distortion expressed as a percent of the maximum fundamental demand load current based on the maximum demand over the applicable demand interval The formula for computing TDD is the same as the IEEE THD formula except the configured value for maximum fundamental load current is substituted for the magnitude of the measured fundamental load current Where gt ay e H magnitude of the n harmonic TDD nee n lt 41 or 63 iy e H maximum fundamental load Table 10 3 of the standard specifies the limits The appropriate limi
234. owermonitor 3000 The application samples depict basic methods for reading and writing data between a Powermonitor 3000 and your programmable controller or other application Expand on these basic steps to customize your application to meet your business needs The sample applications included are 1 Read and write the Powermonitor 3000 system clock using a variety of controllers applications and communications 2 Read multiple Powermonitor 3000 data tables into a SLC 500 controller using DeviceNet communications 3 Set up the user configured data table using a ControlLogix controller and EtherNet IP communications 4 Communications reading and writing Powermonitor tables using an SLC and 1747 SCNR ControlNet scanner ATTENTION Proper operation of the application is the responsibility of the user Rockwell Automation makes no warranty express or implied for these sample applications The sample applications are subject to change at any time without notice Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 2 Sample Applications System Clock Sample Applications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 The Powermonitor 3000 system clock date and time is an ideal sample application for several reasons It is important to set the system clock so that data log records oscillograms etc are recorded with accurate time stamps e It is easy to see if your application has successfully written and read the system clock
235. p format except the year is omitted Capture number in the range 1 to 6 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 24 Advanced Features e Channel number in the range 1 to 7 1 V1 2 I1 3 V2 4 12 5 V3 6 13 7 14 e Block number block number of the data contained in the table See above Transient capture identifier range 0 to 30 000 rolls over to 0 Transient capture data points see below Transient Capture Data Points The results table contains 20 data points for optional DeviceNet communications or 50 data points for all other communications options Data points are numbered 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 in each block The block number ranges from 1 to 70 for DeviceNet and 1 to 28 for all other communications options The client calculates each data point s place in the transient capture using the following formula N datapoinit captur Noptock 1 N J t point this reall Ndatapoint_capture the sequence number of the data point in the capture channel Nblock the block number Ndatapoint_this_read the data point number 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 in the current read The total number of data points is 1400 Each data point is expressed in calibrated analog to digital A D converter counts with a resolution of 8192 13 bit w sign A client may calculate the primary side instantaneous voltage or current magnitude of each data point using the following formula M e 2 s M ar N eM max data M
236. pendently and you may configure each output s operation individually You may use the Display Module or communications to set the output configuration parameters in the Advanced Device Configuration table The output configuration options for the relay and KYZ outputs include Control source specifies what controls the selected output Options are 0 none 1 through 6 pulsed output 7 setpoint control 8 discrete I O control Default 7 Output scale specifies the scaling factor for pulsed operation Range 1 to 30 000 default 10 Output width specifies the pulse width for pulsed operation Range 0 or 40 to 2 000 mSec Force command overrides setpoint communications discrete or pulsed control until the force is released Options are 0 no change 1 force the output energized 2 forced the output de energized 3 release the force Default output state on communications loss specifies response to a loss of communications Options are 0 last state resume 1 last state freeze 2 de energize resume 3 de energize freeze See below Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 6 2 1 0 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Pulsed Control Many electric energy meters provide a dry contact output that changes state at intervals determined by a metered parameter Pulsed control lets the Powermonitor 3000 emulate this function You may select the following options for the Control source p
237. point 15 time 38 Clear setpoint 16 time 39 Clear setpoint 17 time 40 Clear setpoint 18 time 41 Clear setpoint 19 time 42 Clear setpoint 20 time 43 Capture oscillograph e Triggers a capture per the current oscillography configuration Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 30 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 21 Trend Log Configuration Read Back Record Select CSP File No N24 Remote 1 0 BT 34 CIP Assy Inst 26 Write 27 Read No of Elements 26 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 DeviceNet unique write 32768 to 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 4 33 identifier 32767 2 Reserved 0 0 Must be 0 on a write returns 0 3 Read back mode 0 to 6 2 Refer to Setting up the Trend Log on page 7 11 and Reading Data from the Trend Log on page 7 12 4 Logging interval 1 to 3600 900 Expressed in seconds 15min 1 synchronize logging with demand interval 0 disable periodic logging 5 Logging mode 0to1 0 0 Overwrite 1 Fill and hold 6 Clear trend log command Oto 1 0 0 no action 1 clear trend log returns 0 7 Total records logged x 10
238. r Since the power usage varies it is necessary to integrate this parameter over time Power flow can be either forward or reverse wattmeter An instrument for measuring the real power in an electric circuit Its scale is usually graduated in watts kilowatts or megawatts Glossary volt ampere reactive hours VARH The number of VARs used in one hour Since the value of this parameter varies it is necessary to integrate it over time VARs can be either forward or reverse Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 7 Glossary 8 Notes Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 A advanced features 8 1 C catalog number explanation B 1 clear or preset energy counters 4 51 communications 4 1 communications options 2 5 DeviceNet 2 7 Ethernet 2 7 Remote 1 0 2 6 RS 232 2 6 RS 485 native communications 2 5 configurable trend log 7 8 calculating depth 7 9 modes of operation 7 8 reading data 7 12 set up 7 11 configuration advanced device configuration 3 23 basic device configuration 3 22 configuration using the dispaly module 3 21 configuring communications 4 1 DeviceNet 4 5 Ethernet 4 13 Remote 0 4 4 RS 232 4 3 RS 485 4 2 configuring setpoints 5 5 examples of setpoint operation 5 9 reading setpoint status using communications 5 12 using display module 5 11 viewing using display module 5 11 writing configuration communications 5 11 using D data logging 7 1 data messaging data table attrib
239. r 3000 Data Tables Param Parameter name Comment No 33 Demand Current Refer to Table A 12 Metering Demand Results 34 Demand Power 35 Demand Reactive Power 36 Demand Apparent Power 37 Projected Demand 38 Projected Demand W 39 Projected Demand VAR 40 Projected Demand VA 41 L1 True Power Factor Refer to Table A 13 Metering Power Factor Results 42 L2 True Power Factor 43 L3 True Power Factor 44 3 phase True PF 45 L1 Displacement Power Factor 46 L2 Displacement Power Factor 47 L3 Displacement Power Factor 48 3 phase Displacement PF Refer to Table A 13 Metering Power Factor Results 49 L1 Distortion Power Factor 50 L2 Distortion Power Factor 51 L3 Distortion Power Factor 52 3 phase Distortion PF 53 V1 IEEE THD Refer to Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More 54 11 IEEE THD 55 V2 IEEE THD 56 12 IEEE THD 57 V3 IEEE THD 58 13 IEEE THD 59 14 IEEE THD 60 V1 IEC thd DIN 61 11 IEC thd DIN 62 V2 IEC thd DIN 63 12 IEC thd DIN 64 V3 IEC thd DIN 65 13 IEC thd DIN 66 14 IEC thd DIN 67 V1 Crest Factor 68 11 Crest Factor 69 V2 Crest Factor 70 12 Crest Factor 71 V3 Crest Factor 72 13 Crest Factor 73 14 Crest Factor Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 25 Min Max Log Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tabl
240. r to Configuring the Network Demand from the Display Module on page 8 28 Table A 54 Parameters for Trend Log and Configurable Table Applies to Table A 21 Trend Log Configuration Read Back Record Select Table A 22 Trend Log Results Table A 30 User Configured Table Setup Table A 31 User Configured Table Results PM3000 Type All Param No Parameter name Comment None No parameter Relay output status Refer to Table A 3 Discrete Data Solid state KYZ output status Alarm output word Status inputs state Status input 1 counter Status input 2 counter Voltage Mode Wiring Configuration Refer to Table A 4 Basic Device Configuration PT Primary PT Secondary 11 12 13 CT Primary 11 12 13 CT Secondary N 14 CT Primary gt gt gt o o N OTE jl N ow 14 CT Secondary Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 65 Param Parameter name Comment No 14 Date Year Refer to Table A 5 Date and Time 15 Date Month 16 Date Day 17 Time Hour 18 Time Minute 9 Time Seconds 20 Time Hundredths of seconds 21 Date Month day Refer to Table A 5 Date and Time compacted to take less space 22 Time Hour minute 23 Time Second hsec 24 Demand Period Length Refer to Table A 6 Advanced Device Confi
241. rating on a computer with a Microsoft Windows operating system Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor or visit http www software rockwell com for more information on available software packages Communications Every Powermonitor 3000 comes with a native RS 485 communications port that supports the Allen Bradley DF1 half duplex slave protocol The native port is suitable for communicating to DF1 polling master devices including e A B PLC 5 SLC 500 and ControlLogix processors RSLinx software with DDE OPC server functionality e Other third party devices e Software that you develop You may also specify Powermonitor 3000 units with optional communications ports including Serial RS 232 DF1 half duplex slave Remote I O e DeviceNet e Ethernet and EtherNet IP e ControlNet Display Module Product Description 2 3 You may easily integrate a Powermonitor 3000 into a programmable controller based control and monitoring system using your choice of the native or optional communications methods listed above The Bulletin 1404 Display Module is an optional user interface device The Display Module provides the most economical and simplest method for setting up and configuring the Master Module for operation The Display Module has a highly visible two line LED display and four operator buttons with tactile feedback Use the buttons and display to navigate throu
242. rent transformer CT secondary circuit with primary current applied Wiring between the CTs and the Powermonitor 3000 should include a shorting terminal block in the CT secondary circuit Shorting the secondary with primary current present allows other connections to be removed if needed An open CT secondary with primary current applied produces a hazardous voltage which can lead to personal injury death property damage or economic loss The Powermonitor 3000 is not designed for nor intended for use as a circuit protective device Do not use this equipment in place of a motor overload relay or circuit protective relay Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 1 2 Safety Other Precautions Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 IMPORTANT The relay output contacts and solid state KYZ output contacts on the Powermonitor 3000 may be used to control other devices through setpoint control or communications The response of these outputs to a communications failure is configurable by the user Be sure to evaluate the safety impact of the output configuration on your plant or process ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors Follow these guidelines when you handle the module e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device e Do not open the module or attempt to service internal components e If available u
243. rmonitor 3000 to be used in and interact with power and energy applications Some examples of setpoint applications include e Turning on an output relay when predicted demand exceeds a preset level for simple demand management e Turning off an output relay if phase rotation is accidentally reversed helping to assure that loads rotate in the correct direction e Capturing an oscillogram when a status input is energized Setpoint operation permits the Powermonitor 3000 to simultaneously monitor a number of parameters and take action when specified conditions are met The M4 and M5 models support 10 setpoints while the M6 and M8 support 20 There are eight parameters to configure for each setpoint Setpoint Number Type Evaluation Condition High Limit Low Limit Action Delay Release Delay and Action Type These parameters are described in Table 5 1 In the M6 and M8 models setpoints 19 and 20 have special significance and are preset at the factory Refer to Sag and Swell in the Advanced Features chapter of this manual When a setpoint activates it takes the action defined in Setpoint Action Type and writes a time stamped entry to the Event Log Setpoint action types that energize a relay or KYZ output or set an alarm flag are maintained until the setpoint releases Other setpoint actions such as capturing an oscillograph or clearing a counter occur when the setpoint activates The Powermonitor 3000 also writes a time stamped entry i
244. rotocols 1 CSP protocol 2 CIP protocol When master module firmware lt V1 12 amp Ethernet firmware lt V2 01 protocol supported is CSP and this parameter is reserved write a 0 always reads 0 Reserved on Series B Must be 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 12 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Ethernet Element No Element name Reserved Units Default Value 0 Comment Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 i ControlNet Element No 0 Element name Password 0 to 9999 Units Default Value 0 Comment Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 MAC ID 0 to 99 99 On a write sets MAC ID node address of Powermonitor 3000 on ControlNet network CO CO NI oD Cn BY GC NM S 3 3 3 3 3 amp CO N 9 of A co RO gt o Reserved Reserved Must be 0 on a write returns 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 13 Remote 1 0 Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Valid password required to change configuration data Returns 1 1 Logical rack address 1 to 63 The scanner uses rack address 0 2 Module group 0 2 4 6 0 0 Group 0 acts like the first 2 rack slots 2 Group 2 4 Group 4 6 Group 6 3 Last rack 0 to1 0 0 No 1 Yes 4 Baud
245. rray must have specific values e Word 0 Powermonitor 3000 password default 0 Word 1 must be one of the following decimal values 31 for CSP PCCC Typed Write 1 or 37 for CIP Set Attr Single Word 2 zero 0 for writes to table 31 37 For configuring instance 1 0 all integer table instance 1 data type 1 all float table Ginstance 1 data type e Word 3 between 1 and 295 incl Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 28 Sample Applications Ladder Diagram Sample logic program that shows a way to configure a Powermonitor 3000 User Configurable Data Table from a ControlLogix controller via the 1404 NENET communications option card using Ethernet IP See the accompanying text for a list of tags to be created in the ControlLogix controller The first rung allows a selection of tables to write to the PM3000 Enter a 0 1 or 2 into the tag Select to select between the default table a custom table or an Undo of the last write The selected table is copied into the Download table The rung logic also copies the PM3000 password into the Download table If the password is changed from the default 0 the new password must be entered into the tag pwd Toggle the Start tag to begin Start Oneshot_1 o ons J EQU COP Equal Copy File Source A Select Source Default 0 2 Dest Download 0 Source B
246. rs ending in 232 LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition F Off Not Used RS 232 RX Off The RS 232 bus is idle no active data is present Flashing Green Powermonitor 3000 is receiving data RS 232 TX Off The Powermonitor 3000 is not transmitting any data onto the RS 232 bus Flashing Green The Powermonitor 3000 is transmitting data Table 2 5 Remote 1 0 Optional Communications catalog numbers ending in RIO LED LED Color LED State and Communications Condition F1 off Not Used F2 off Not Used R 1 0 Off Remote 1 0 communications has not been established Flashing Green Remote 1 0 communications has been established but there are errors Steady Green Remote 1 0 communications has been established Table 2 6 DeviceNet Optional Communications catalog numbers ending in DNT LED LED Color LED State and Communications E Condition F1 Off Not Used B f F2 Off Not Used F1 Network Status Off Power is off or the Powermonitor 3000 is not online C F2 Flashing Green Network status is OK no connections established C NETWORK Steady Green Network status is OK connections STATUS established Flashing Red Recoverable communications failure port is restarting Steady Red Non recoverable communications error check wiring and configuration parameters Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 12 Produ
247. s 20 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type Ethernet Series B Element No Parameter name Range Default Description Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 On a write the correct password is required to change configuration data On a read 1 is returned 1 Input mode 0to3 3 Refer to Network Demand Synchronization Ethernet Series B I 2 Broadcast port number 300 to 300 only on page 8 26 400 3 Time server IP address byte 1 0 to255 0 4 Time server IP address byte 2 5 Time server IP address byte 3 6 Time server IP address byte 4 7 Time zone 12to12 0 8 Time set update interval 0 to 60 I 32766 Sec 9 Reserved 0 0 Reserved for future use 10 Reserved 0 0 Ona write only a 0 is accepted On a read always returns 0 1 Reserved 0 0 2 Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved 0 0 14 Reserved 0 0 15 Reserved 0 0 16 Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved 0 0 8 Reserved 0 0 9 Reserved 0 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 64 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables l Table A 53 Controller Command CSP File No N53 Remote 1 0 BT CIP Assy Inst 67 No of Elements 1 User Configurable No Data Type Integer Data Access Read only PM3000 Type Series B Ethernet only Elemement Element name Range Default Description No Value 0 Controller Command Bits 0 0 to 32767 0 Refe
248. s 4 39 Figure 4 8 ControlLogix to Powermonitor 3000 Communication Tab Example Message Configuration msgPM3K_Y I ENET IP Bridge 2 130 151 70 173 The first example below reads the Voltage and Current table from a Powermonitor 3000 into the ControlLogix controller tag dataPM3K_VI O using a PLC 5 Typed Read configured as an array of 14 elements of type Real You would configure a CIP Data Table Read the same way except for the message type Figure 4 9 ControlLogix PLC 5 Typed Read Example Message Configuration msgPM3K_ I dataPM3k_ I E The next example shows the message configuration for a CIP Generic message type A CIP Generic message can read or write data depending on the Service Type you specify Refer to DeviceNet class services in the discussion above In this example the ControlLogix Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 40 Communications reads the User Configured Data Table into tag dataPM3K_User O configured as an array of 23 elements of Real type Figure 4 10 ControlLogix CIP Generic Messaging Example Message Configuration msgPM3K_User CIP Generic Get Attribute Single E l Cisi _ dataPM3K Usero This example uses the following message parameter values Service Type Get_Attribute_Single service code oe hex Object class 4 hex Assembly Instance 37 decimal User configured table results e Attribute 3 hex Data Publication 14
249. s successful Bit B3 0 1 is set to transfer any floats t o the F8 0 file after swapping words from the incomming message Done Bit Message Pending Time Out Bit Error bit N7 0 B3 0 N7 0 N7 0 CoP 0004 J E J i Jz Copy File 13 0 8 12 Source M0 3 1350 Dest N10 0 Length 64 Message Pending B3 0 U gt 0 Perform Read N9 11 U gt 1 Allow Write N9 11 C i 2 Enable Transfer Bit N Done Bit N7 0 CUD 13 Transfer Successful N7 0 CL 9 Swap Words B3 0 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 0005 0006 0007 When an error or timeout occurs bit maintenance is performed to ready the ladder for the next message leaving the timeout or error bit set Sample Applications C 39 Time Out Bit Message Pending N7 0 B3 0 JE CUD JLE 8 0 Error bit Perform Read N7 0 N9 11 J E KID JSE 12 1 Allow Write N9 11 U gt 0 Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 Q gt 15 This calls the word swap routine and returns after the swapping has been completed Swap Words Swap Words B3 0 B3 0 J E a gt J E WW 1 1 JSR Jump To Subroutine SBR File Number U 3 CEND gt Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 c 40 Sample Applications Perpare to swap words by copying
250. s up it first illuminates all of its LED s for approximately 2 seconds It then displays its firmware revision number N C CTA ahd f R IN k a ma T a Dy After about 2 seconds the display waits for communication with the Master Module If it doesn t receive any messages within 8 seconds it displays a 7 Lhee A M R z gt lt At any time if the DM stops receiving information from the Master Module it displays the Check Rx message If it is receiving messages but not able to send messages it determines this from a lack of response from the Master Module the DM displays a 7 Lhee A M Tov ion Once the DM begins communicating with the Master Module it displays it on the screen and the Check Rx or Check Tx messages disappear No operator intervention is required to clear these messages Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 17 Scrolling When messages are too large to fit on the display a scrolling mechanism is employed The message scrolls horizontally The default scroll rate was chosen to give you enough time to see the message but not take too much time to show the entire message You may select from two different scroll rates using the Advanced Configuration Menu on the Display Module Take care to see the entire message before taking any action as some of the messages are very similar and differ only by a few characters Editing a Parameter 1 Using the Display Module keys move into Pr
251. se a static safe workstation e When not in use keep the module in its static shield bag Chapter 2 Product Description The Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 is uniquely designed and developed to meet the needs of both producers of and users of electric power A Powermonitor 3000 system consists of e Master Module which provides metering data logging native RS 485 communications and other advanced features depending on the model e Optional Display Module for configuration entering commands and displaying data e Optional communications port to serve data to other devices using a choice of networks e Optional external devices and applications that display and utilize data for reporting control and management of power and energy usage The Powermonitor 3000 is a microprocessor based monitoring and control device ideally suited for a variety of applications including e Load Profiling Using the configurable trending utility to log power parameters such as real power apparent power and demand for analysis of power usage by loads over time e Demand Management Understanding when and why demand charges occur lets you make informed decisions that reduce your electrical power costs Cost Allocation Knowing your actual energy costs promotes manufacturing efficiencies Distribution System Monitoring Using power parameters to show power flow system topology and distribution equipment status e Emer
252. sequencer instruction and indirect addressing to optimize program operation During initialization of Run mode the sequencer input file is loaded with the numbers corresponding to the two explicit message transfers to be performed Once Run mode has begun the ladder program remains in this gt Data Files Used mode The speed at which the processor performs the messages may be altered by resetting the On Delay timer that is located within the sequencer output rung However the availability of new data values is controlled by the Powermonitor 3000 table update rate Table C 1 Data Files Data File Number of Description Address Elements N9 1 N9 0 Sequencer Output N10 Variable N10 0 Sequencer Input R6 0 Sequencer Control Message Read Data Table Locations Control Data N20 F30 14 Voltage Current Data N21 F31 13 Real Time Power N22 F32 13 Power Factor N23 N33 23 KWh and KVAh Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 20 Sample Applications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Table C 1 Data Files Data File Number of Description Address Elements N24 N34 23 KVarh N25 F35 10 Demand N26 N36 27 Diagnostic The reset word for the sequencer is N10 0 The first word in the rotation of the sequencer is N10 1 The value in N10 0 must be the same as that in N10 1 The size of file N10 is equal to the size of the largest sequencer input file This
253. size depends on the number of explicit message transfers to be performed The sequencer length may be expanded or reduced for run mode It is imperative that the corresponding file that serves as the source of the sequencer s input file N10 must be modified accordingly IMPORTANT Failure to modify the length of file N10 for a modification of either the Configuration or Run sequence results in improper operation of the ladder program and possible FAULT of the processor due to invalid indirect offsets File Data Values Prior to running the sample ladder the sequencer initialization file needs to be loaded with the numbers that correspond to the explicit message transfer sequence The following is a list of each mode s initialization file and the required possible numbers to be stored in each The first value of a block transfer sequence must be duplicated in both position 0 and 1 of an initialization file N10 Run Mode Required numbers are 20 20 21 22 23 24 25 and 26 N20 0 Required numbers are 5121 6 3589 4 14 3 N21 0 Required numbers are 5377 6 3589 4 16 3 Sample Applications C 21 N22 0 Required numbers are 5633 6 3589 4 18 3 N23 0 Required numbers are 5889 6 3589 4 20 3 N24 0 Required numbers are 6145 6 3589 4 22 3 N25 0 Required numbers are 6401 6 3589 4 17 3 N26 0 Required numbers are 6657 6 3589 4 23 3 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 22 Sample Applica
254. source to N11 temp file Initialize the word counter N12 0 SBR COP 0000 Subroutine Copy File Source N10 0 Dest N11 0 Length 64 MOV Move Source 0 0 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt Perform this task until all the words have been swapped A size of 32 was selected to handle all power monitor files 03 1 LES ADD 0001 LBL Less Than A lt B Add Source A N12 0 Source A 1 30 lt 1 lt Source B 30 Source B N12 0 30 lt 30 lt Dest N12 1 29 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 1 0 lt Dest N12 2 0 lt MOV Move Source N11 N12 0 0 lt Dest N11 N12 1 0 lt MOV Move Source N12 2 0 lt Dest N11 N12 0 0 lt ADD Add Source A 2 2 lt Source B N12 0 30 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt 03 1 JMP Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 0002 0003 0004 When the word swapping is complete transfer the results into F8 FLT_DATA file EQU Equal Source A N12 0 30 lt Source B 30 30 lt Sample Applications C 41 COP Copy File Source N11 0 Dest F8 0 Length 32 RET Return Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 c 42 Sample Applications Initialize N12 0 word counter Copy F13 configuration float data to N11 temporary file SBR MOV 0000 Subroutine Move Source 0 0 lt Dest N12 0 30 lt COP Copy File Source F13
255. splays scaled metered data in its basic units such as volts amps watts etc Prefixes such as K or M are used to denote multipliers of 1 000 kilo and 1 000 000 mega The DM expresses Power factor as a percentage with a positive value indicating leading and a negative value indicating lagging The Display Module displays values to a maximum precision of five significant digits Viewing Metered Data Using the Display Module The Display Module makes it easy to view the metering data produced by the Powermonitor 3000 Refer to Display Module Functionality later in this chapter for information on use of the Display Module Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 4 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Voltage Current and Frequency Results Line to line voltage results L1 L2 12 13 and 3 L1 are calculated for all wiring modes Line to neutral voltage results L1 N L2 N and L3 N are calculated in wye and single phase wiring modes only In delta wiring modes line to neutral voltages return a zero value Average line to line Aug L L and line to neutral Avg Z N voltage results return the mathematical average of the three line to line or line to neutral voltages respectively For single phase wiring modes the average line to neutral voltage is the mathematical average of phase 1 to neutral Z1 N and phase 2 to neutral Z2 N voltages Current results include individu
256. ss Devices on the same subnet can communicate directly devices on different subnets may communication with each other only through a gateway or router The Gateway IP Address defines the address of the gateway or router on the unit s subnet that is used to route messages to other subnets for wide area networking Default 128 1 1 1 If the IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 any user settings for Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address are ignored and these parameters are obtained from a bootp server Series A only Keep Alive Time Series A only defines the maximum time that the unit keeps a socket dedicated to a connection that is not responding The unit probes inactive connections at this rate and closes the connection if the remote device does not respond within 8 probes The range is 0 to 3 600 seconds default is 30 seconds 0 disables sending of Keep Alive packets The Protocol Select parameter Series A only determines which protocol the Ethernet port uses Choices are 0 for CSP and CIP dual stack 1 for CSP only and 2 for CIP only CSP is the client server protocol also called PCCC used by some legacy Allen Bradley PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers CIP is the control and information protocol that underlies EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet communications EtherNet IP is an open standard used by a number of suppliers The default setting is 0 dual stack CSP and CIP Series B only supports CIP Table 4 5 Optional Ethernet Commu
257. ssage control status Message Pending B3 0 CoP 0000 4 H Copy File 0 Source M0 3 1000 Dest N7 0 Length 10 request information into the request area of the M0 file offset 1000 9 Set the bit for Message Pending After setting up N9 CIP_SETUP file turn on bit N9 11 1 to start the read transfer from the power monitor This process clears out words of N7 0 CIP message file Copies the request from the CIP_SETUP file to N7 first 9 words Moves a 0 to MO scanner locat M0 3 1009 This loacation needs to be set to 0 when requesting information Enable the transfer by turning bit N7 0 15 EN to 1 Copy the he first ion Perform Read Message Pending N9 11 B3 0 FLL 0001 J H E Fill File 1 0 Source 0 Dest N7 0 Length 9 COP Copy File Source N9 0 Dest N7 0 Length 9 MOV Move Source 0 0 lt Dest M0 3 1009 lt Enable Transfer Bit N7 0 CL 15 CoP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest M0 3 1000 Length 9 Message Pending B3 0 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 lt gt 0 0002 0003 Sample Applications C 37 When a write of a float file is being performed it is necessary to swap the words in the float file before sending the write re quest This is oily necessary for Instance 4 or Instance 52 Allow Write N9 11 EQU JSR J4 H Equal Jump To Subroutine Source A N9 6 SBR File
258. t Element name Units Range Comment No 0 L1 True Power Factor Percent 100to100 Ratio between power and apparent power 1 L2 True Power Factor 100 to 100 Lead 2 L3 True Power Factor A001100 189 3 3 phase True PF 00 to 100 4 L1 Displacement Power Factor 00 to 100 Cosine of the phase angle between the fundamental 5 L2 Displacement Power Factor 00 to 100 voltage and current 6 L3 Displacement Power Factor 100 to 100 tee 7 3 phase Displacement PF 100 to 100 8 L1 Distortion Power Factor 0 to 100 The ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental and 9 Distortion Power Factor 0 to 100 the sum of the magnitudes for all of the current harmonics 10 L3 Distortion Power Factor 0 to 100 11 3 phase Distortion PF 0 to 100 12 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 14 Metering Real and Apparent Energy Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 21 CSP File No N20 Remote 1 0 BT 29 CIP Assy Inst 19 Write 20 Read No of Elements 23 User Configurable No Required to clear or preset energy counters Returns 1 Refer to How to Clear or Preset Energy Counters Using Data Type Integer Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type All Element Element Name Range Units Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 1 Parameter select 0to7 bitf
259. t SLC 5 03 as the Processor Type Leave the rest of the settings as default DDE OPC Topic Configuration SLC 503 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 14 Sample Applications 6 Click Apply and confirm when prompted Click the Advanced Communications tab to verify the driver and path settings in the topic Click the Done button DDE OPC Topic Configuration DF1_1404_123 AB_MASTR 1 DF1 Sta 0 COM1 RUNNIN The Microsoft Excel Sample Worksheet The sample worksheet uses Visual Basic for Applications VBA macros to read and set the date and time in the Powermonitor 3000 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 15 Microsoft Excel SimpleDdeWriteE xample xls Password Year Month 3 Day Hour Minute 6 Second Hundredths of second The range Sheet1 D7 D14 is the write source range and the read target range The Read graphic element is associated with the following VBA script or macro Sub ReadDateAndTimeQ Open DDE link the first argument is the application we want to DDE with Second argument is the DDE topic name configured in RSLinx RSIchan DDEInitiate RSLINX DF1_1404_123 Read the date time table from the PM3000 and put it in the excel sheet Range Sheet1 D7 D14 DDERequest RSIchan N11 0 1L8 Close DDE link DDETerminate RSIchan End Sub The Write graphic element is ass
260. t and stays above the limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay Figure 5 4 Under Reverse Setpoint Operation Setpoint Activated Setpoint Deactivated Time s 0 va gt Setpoint Action Delay a y lt Setpoint K Release Delay ba gt Setpoint Release Delay Configuring Setpoints Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 5 Equal Setpoint An equal setpoint activates when the monitored parameter equals the Setpoint High Limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay An equal setpoint releases when the monitored parameter does not equal the Setpoint High Limit for a period of time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay The Setpoint Low Limit is not used for equal and not equal setpoints Not Equal Setpoint A not equal setpoint is the opposite of an equal setpoint activating when monitored parameter does not equal the Setpoint High Limit for a time greater than the Setpoint Action Delay It releases when the monitored parameter equals the Setpoint High Limit for a period of time greater than the Setpoint Release Delay You may configure setpoints using the Display Module or by writing the setpoint configuration table using communications The following tables describe setpoint configuration parameters Table 5 1 Setpoint Configuration Parameter Name Parameter Description Range Units Default Setpoint Number The number of the setpoint being configured 1 to 10
261. t be listed in a permanent or temporary polling list of the master device and the error checking must be set to CRC When communications is established the RS 485 or RS 232 RX and TX status LEDs will flash alternately at a rapid rate If you are using Rockwell Software RSLinx as a polling master the Powermonitor 3000 will appear in RSWho if it is defined in the polling list For best communications performance using RSLinx keep the number of concurrent clients to a minimum for example turn off the auto browse function in RSWho To communicate with an Allen Bradley PLC 5 SLC 500 or ControlLogix controller use message instructions that address the DF1 master port number the Powermonitor 3000 node address the Powermonitor 3000 data table address e g F17 0 Metering Power Results and the length of the file in elements The target file must be of the same data type as the Powermonitor 3000 data table e g integer or floating point Communications 4 27 MEAT Because the floating point word order in the ControlLogix controller is reversed from that in the Powermonitor 3000 your ladder logic will need to reverse the word order so the data may be interpreted correctly The swap byte SWPB instruction performs this function Because of the DF1 protocol s inherent handshaking the completion of each message may be used to activate the next message without any additional programmed delay Remote 1 0 Communications Opt
262. t ratings of your PTs if used and CTs If your system configuration includes a neutral current CT you will need to separately configure the I4 CT ratio Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 23 PT primary range 1 to 10 000 000 default 480 e PT secondary range 1 to 600 default 480 e CT primary range 1 to 10 000 000 default 5 e CT Secondary range 1 to 5 default 5 e 4 primary and I4 secondary same as CT primary and secondary For direct connection to power systems of 600 V set the PT ratio to 600 600 For a 480 V system set the PT ratio to 480 480 Nominal system voltage M6 M8 only The M6 and M8 models use the nominal voltage setting for calculating the default sag and swell setpoint high and low limits For Wye and single phase wiring modes set this value to the PT primary side nominal line to neutral For all other wiring modes set this parameter to the PT primary side nominal line to line voltage Range 1 to 10 000 000 default 480 When setting a parameter you may press and hold the up arrow or down arrow key for a few seconds to increase the rate the value increments or gt decrements Refer to the Powermonitor 3000 Installation Instructions publication 1404 IN007 for information on selecting and installing PTs and CTs Advanced Device Configuration A number of parameters are grouped into Advanced Configuration including the Password demand and projected demand setup relay and KYZ pulse operation setup
263. t the Interscan Delay to at least 100 mS An Interscan Delay of less than 100 mS will slow the Powermonitor 3000 s delivery of metering information e Background Polls the Powermonitor 3000 at intervals you specify using the Foreground to Background Poll Ratio So long as the Powermonitor 3000 is polled no more frequently than every 100 mS it will operate and communicate at its optimal rate You may calculate the total scan time with this formula Communications 4 29 Total Scan Time 1 R D Where R Foreground to Background Poll Ratio D Interscan Delay Change of State I O messaging COS reports data only when the content of the I O table changes COS messaging can be more efficient for discrete applications because it tends to reduce the network traffic If you have configured the input message table to include metering data however COS may reduce the network efficiency because the data constantly changes Cyclic I O messaging reports data periodically according to a time increment you configure COS and Cyclic messaging typically reduce the network bandwidth loading compared with Polled messaging To optimize explicit messaging performance use a Background Polled 1 O connection with a high foreground to background poll ratio To help obtain optimal network operation verify the following settings using RSNetworx for DeviceNet looking at the scanner Properties dialog For Polled I O messaging verify that the
264. ta Type Floating Point Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type M8 only Applies to Table 43 Transient analysis metering results Element Element name Range Default Comment No Value 0 Password 0 to 9999 0 Required for configuration 1 for readback select returns 1 1 DeviceNet unique write 32768 to 32767 0 Refer to DeviceNet Unique Write Identifier on page 4 33 identifier 2 Capture 0 to 6 1 Refer to Transient Analysis Configuration on page 8 20 3 Cycle 1 to 12 1 4 Read back mode 0 to 1 0 5 Detection mode Oto3 1 6 Reserved 0 0 7 Auto threshold set command 0 to 1 0 8 Auto threshold set duration 1 to 3600 10 9 Auto threshold set margin 1 0 to 100 0 20 0 10 Voltage trigger threshold 0 1 to 100 0 10 0 11 Current trigger threshold 0 1 to 100 0 10 0 12 Auto threshold duration time 0 0 left Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 54 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 44 Transient Analysis Metering Results CSP File No Remote 1 0 BT 32 CIP Assy Inst 54 No of Elements 14 User Configurable No Refer to Reading Transient Analysis Metering Data on page Data Type Floating Point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type M8 only Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Capture number 1 to6 1 Cycle number 1 to 12 8 21 2 L1 L2 or L1 N Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 3 L2 L3 or L2 N Voltage 0 0 to 9
265. tallation guidelines to maintain these ratings ANSI IEEE Tested Meets or exceeds the Surge Withstand Capability SWC C37 90 1 1989 for protective relays and relay systems on all power connection circuit terminations Measurement Accuracy and Range See table below for the rating of each parameter Table D 1 Measurement Accuracy and Range Parameter Accuracy in of Full Scale at 25 C 50 60 Hz Unity Power Facator Nominal Range M4 M5 M6 M8 Voltage Sense Inputs V1 V2 0 2 0 05 0 05 0 05 347V 15 to 399V yy V3 RMS 600V 26 to 691V RMS Current Sense Input 11 12 13 0 2 0 05 0 05 0 05 5A 50 mA 10 6A 14 RMS Frequency 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 0 05 Hz 50 or 60 Hz 40 to 75 Hz Power Functions kW kVA ANSI C12 16 and ANSIC12 20 and ANSIC12 20 and ANSI C12 20 and E OKVAR EN 61036 Class 1 EN 60687 Class EN 60687 Class EN 60687 Class Demand Functions kW kVA Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy 0 5 Accuracy Energy Functions kWH kVAH Class 0 2 is also Class 0 2 isalso Class 0 2 is also available available available Metering Update Rates 55 to 80 ms 45 to 70 ms 45 to 75 ms A0to 90 ms Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 D 4 Technical Specifications Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 General Input Output and Environmental Ratings Table D 2 Input and Output Ratings Control Power 1 404 xxxxA xxx 102V 264V ac 47 63 Hz or 106V
266. te I O communications Table A 27 is a read only data table containing 14 M4 M5 17 M6 or 18 M8 only integer elements as follows e Reserved returns 0 e Event record internal identifier An incremental number assigned to each new event See below Timestamp event timestamp expressed in four element timestamp format see below e Event type see Table 7 1 e Event command code see Table 7 1 and Table 7 2 Setpoint type evaluation condition level action release delay and action if event is a setpoint these elements return additional information about the setpoint The Setpoint level expressed in integer exponent format records the worst case value of the setpoint parameter Sustain limit timer M6 M8 only time the setpoint parameter exceeded the limit expressed in integer exponent format Capture identifier M6 M8 only identifies oscillograph or transient capture number if applicable Event text available M8 only 0 indicates no user comment 1 indicates a user comment has been stored in the current record see below Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 7 6 Data Logging Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 For the M8 model you may use the Event record internal identifier and the Event text available flag for reading and writing user comments Please refer to the section immediately below The Powermonitor 3000 expresses timestamps in an array of four data table elements B gt Year Mo
267. teger Data Access Read Only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Range Comment No 0 Relay output status 0to3 0 De energized amp not forced 1 Solid state KYZ output status 1 Energized amp not forced 2 Force De energized 3 Force Energized 2 Alarm output word 0 to FFFF Bitfield indicating state of the 16 alarm output flags 0 released 1 asserted Bit 0 relay setpoint output flag 1 Bit 1 KYZ setpoint output flag 2 Bit 2 setpoint output flag 3 Bit 15 setpoint output flag 16 3 Status inputs state 0to3 Bit 0 status input 1 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 1 status input 2 0 open 1 contact closure detected Bit 2 demand sync timeout 1 the demand delay expired before the next expected external demand sync This bit clears when the next external demand sync occurs Refer to Table A 6 Advanced Device Configuration element 23 Bits 3 15 unused always 0 4 Status input 1 counter 0 to Counts to 29 999 rolls over to 0 5 Status input 2 counter 29999 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 4 Basic Device Configuration Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 7 CSP File No F10 Remote 1 0 BT 20 CIP Assy Inst 4 Write 5 Read No of Elements 8 M4 M5 9 M6 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read Write PM3000 Type See table Element
268. tered data in the display module 3 3 power factor results 3 7 power results 3 6 projected demand calculation 3 10 symmetrical component analysis results 3 5 viewing metered data using the display module 3 3 voltage current and frequency results 3 4 metering update rate 3 30 min max log 7 13 accessing using display module 7 13 interfacing using communications 7 14 multiple data table reads using DeviceNet C 16 explicit message transfer setup C 16 SLC 500 sequencer operation C 19 0 operation editing a digital parameter 3 17 oscillography 8 1 configuring 8 1 reading data 8 4 other precautions 1 2 P performance features 2 4 Powermonitor 3000 operations 3 1 product approvals D 1 ANSI IEEE tested D 3 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 CE certification D 2 ControlNet conformance testing D 1 EMC directive D 2 EtherNet IP conformance testing D 1 IEC529 NEMA UL 508 D 2 low voltage directive D 2 UL CUL D 2 product description 2 1 relay and KYZ output operation 6 1 communications loss behavior 6 4 descrete 1 0 control 6 3 forced operation 6 3 no control operation 6 3 pulsed control 6 2 setpoint control 6 3 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 4 7 S safety considerations 1 1 sag and swell 8 13 sample applications C 1 setpoint programming and operation 5 1 equal 5 5 not equal 5 5 over forward 5 2 over reverse 5 3 under forward 5 3 under reverse 5 4 specifications D 1 D 3 control relay D 4 general input outp
269. the Network Demand from the Display Modules oeny ae treme trata ee a a a ede A 8 28 Appendix A Appendix B Master Module onua mths ait of acd ohe bul tio GO Poke Roo B 1 DiS Dla Modulen gt set uote ental aa ees hylan ep ae ani es Oe B 2 Appendix C TAM EO CMICH OR hc see oe a MOR deh phot We E r ae ew C 1 System Clock Sample Applications C 2 Multiple Data Table Reads Using DeviceNet C 16 User Configured Data Table Setup Using ControlLogix and EtheiNet I Peen ttn enaa ia eo eden ate a PRE Sula es C 26 Communicating with a SLC5 05 1747 L552 Controller and ControlNet Scanner 1747 SCNR Unscheduled Messaging C 32 Appendix D Product Approvals o a sk Boe tad ccd kek tance ree Re eh doe D 1 Technical Specifications 4 20 5 48 OYE EGS OE OVE SE BG D 3 Appendix E Using This User Manual Preface What This User Manual Contains Review the table below to familiarize yourself with the topics contained in this User Manual For information about Refer to Chapter Safety 1 Product Description 2 Communications Options Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 Metering Functionality Display Module Functionality Configuration Using the Display Module Metering Update Rate Communications 4 Configuring Communications Data Messaging Overview Data Messaging Application Considerations Setpoint Programming and Operation 5 Theory of Setpoint Operation Configuring Setpoints 1 0 Operations 6
270. the Powermonitor 3000 to convey the information Table 3 4 Power and Power Factor Results Parameter Phase 1 Power Phase 2 Power Phase 3 Power 3 Phase Total Power Description Range Units Power of individual phase or sum of phases 0 to 999 9x1022 Watts signed to show direction Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Apparent Power 3 Phase Total Apparent Power Phase 1 Reactive Power Reactive power of individual phase or sum of all g to 999 9x1022 VARs phases signed to show direction volt amperes Phase 2 Reactive Power reactive Phase 3 Reactive Power 3 Phase Total Reactive Power Phase 1 Apparent Power Apparent power of individual phase or sum of all 0 to 999 9x1922 VA phases volt amperes Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 8 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Table 3 4 Power and Power Factor Results Parameter Description Range Units Phase 1 True Power Factor The ratio between the power and apparent 100 to 100 Percent z power for an individual phase or all three hase 2 True Power Factor phases signed to show lead or lag Phase 3 True Power Factor Total True Power Factor Phase 1 Distortion Power Factor The ratio between the magnitude of the 0 to 100 Percent Phase 2 Distortion P Fact fundamental and the sum of the magnitudes for ASE Sores AGLO all of the current harmonics for an individual Phase 3 Distor
271. the Set_date_time to set the Powermonitor 3000 clock to January 1 2003 at midnight The tag PM3K_Date_Time shows the results of a read 7 13 seconds after the write Scope Ce a TagName Value lt l Se ae L EPa Das emoa zoos TPH Date L EPMK Dae L ENK Dae TT EM Dae L awk Dae L sew Dae 7 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 8 Sample Applications 0 IE 1 a ie JIC End Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Ladder Diagram Read_clock_from_PM3K MSG 4 E Type PLC5 Typed Read EN Message Control Read_Time CDN gt lt ER gt Read_Time DN Read_clock_from_PM3K a ie U gt IL 2 Read_Time ER TE IME Set_time_from_CLX MSG Type PLC5 Typed Write EN Message Control Set_time CDND CER gt Set_time DN Set_time_from_CLX JE gt Set_time ER dit IC Message Setup Dialogs The example uses PLC 5 Typed read and write message types The setup dialogs are similar to those found on page 4 38 and page 4 39 ControlNet and ControlLogix The fourth example reads and writes the Powermonitor 3000 date and time using a ControlLogix controller and ControlNet communications Tags The example uses two ControlLogix tags as shown below The tags are INT 8 arrays Sample Applications c 9 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 10 End
272. the factory a Powermonitor 3000 will log net kilowatt hours kWh net kVAR hours kVarh and demand watts at 15 minute intervals in overwrite mode Data Logging 7 9 If you use the Powermonitor 3000 with an energy logging software such as RSEnergyMetrix you should coordinate the parameters selected for the gt Trend Log with those logged by the software This allows for the energy logging software to poll the Trend Log data allowing for less frequent polling and automatic data repopulation of the energy database Calculating Trend Log Depth How long the Trend Log takes to fill may be as little as 90 minutes or as long as 5 years depending on how you configure the log These formulas will help you configure the trend log to obtain the results you want Round off any results to the next lower integer Trend Log Depth Formula This formula returns the number of records in the trend log for the number of parameters logged To determine the length of time this represents multiply the result by the trend log interval p F e 65524 Pe 4 6 Where D Depth of the trend log in records F Fill mode 0 fill and hold 1 overwrite P Parameters per record 1 16 Parameters per Record formula If your application requires a certain number of records or time to preserve logged information this formula returns the number of parameters per record allowed _ 7 F 16381 _ D P 1 5 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P
273. the nominal system voltage To effectively use sag and or swell detection 1 Set RMS result averaging to 0 no averaging for the quickest setpoint response to changes in input voltage Load Factor Advanced Features 8 15 2 Alter setpoint configuration if necessary to adjust the sensitivity to sags and or swells 3 If using the setpoint to trigger an oscillograph capture make sure there is at least one capture location that is clear and ready to accept a new capture 4 Periodically check the event log or capture ready status for an indication that a sag or swell has occurred 5 Read the event log to get the timestamp duration of the disturbance the worst case magnitude and the identifier of the capture 6 Find the capture that has the same identifier as the one found in the event log record by reading the first block from each capture location Read the entire capture from the Powermonitor 3000 Depending on the duration of the disturbance the capture may contain additional information prior to and during the sag or swell event The sag or swell duration reported in the event log has a tolerance of 2x the metering update rate Refer to Metering Update Rate on page 3 30 for more information For sag and swell durations less than 500 milliseconds examining the oscillograph data can result in a more accurate determination of sag or swell duration References IEEE Std 1159 1995 IEEE Recommended Practice f
274. this parameter is 1 to 99 with a default of 99 A node number of 0 is typically used as the address of a ControlNet scanner Through communications the Powermonitor 3000 becomes an effective source of power and energy data to enterprise information and automation systems This section of the manual provides an overview of data messaging with the Powermonitor 3000 Following the overview discussions will focus on the details of messaging using specific communications types e g serial Remote I O DeviceNet and Ethernet The Powermonitor 3000 is a read write data server It does not initiate data messages but responds to messages from client devices Its data is organized in data tables similar to those found in a SLC 5 03 programmable controller Four primary methods to communicate with a Powermonitor 3000 are Communications 4 17 Table Writes A client may write a table of data to the Powermonitor 3000 Only full data tables may be written Data writes may be performed to configure device features set the date and time reset or preset energy counters and select records for subsequent reads Simple Data Reads A client may read metering or configuration data The client may read an entire data table or any number of consecutive data elements up to the table boundary Indexed Data Reads The Powermonitor 3000 parses large data structures such as logs oscillograms harmonics and transient captures into data blocks records and
275. ting material or dielectric A capacitor stores electrical energy blocks the flow of direct current and permits the flow of alternating current to a degree dependent upon the capacitance and frequency They may also be used to adjust the power factor in a system connected load The total load which a customer can impose on the electrical system if everything was connected at one time Connected loads can be measured in horsepower watts or volt amperes Some rate schedules establish a minimum demand charge by imposing a fee per unit of connected load Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Glossary 2 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 current transformer CT A transformer intended for measuring or control purposes designed to have its primary winding connected in series with a conductor carrying the current to be measured or controlled CT s step down high currents to lower values which can be used by measuring instruments current transformer ratio The ratio of primary amperes divided by secondary amperes demand hours The equivalent number of hours in a month during which the peak demand is fully utilized In other words if energy consumption for the current month is X kwhr and the peak demand is Y Kw then the demand hours is equal to X Y hours The higher the number of demand hours the better the demand leveling situation and the more effectively demand is being used demand interval Demand c
276. tion Power Factor phase or all three phases Total Distortion Power Factor Phase 1 Displacement Power Factor The cosine of the phase angle between the 100 to 100 Percent Phase 2 Disol tp Fact fundamental voltage and current for an ad a ect i individual phase or all three phases signed to Phase 3 Displacement Power Factor show lead or lag Total Displacement Power Factor Figure 3 1 Explanation of Power Factor Values Pf 0 kVAR Import kVARHR F Forward 90 Power Factor A Power Factor Leading Lagging t Pf 100 Pf 100 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 kW Export 180 lt kWH R Reverse Power Factor Lagging y 270 Pf 0 gt 0 kw Import kWH F Forward Power Factor Leading kVAR Export kVARHR R Reverse Energy Results The Powermonitor 3000 calculates energy values including kWh forward reverse and net kVAh kVARh forward reverse and net and kAh You may read these values using the Display Module or via communications Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 9 Configurable Energy Counter Rollover You may configure the number of digits at which energy values roll over to zero The parameter range is 4 to 15 digits Configure this setting in Advanced Device Configuration using the Display Module or by writing to Table A 6 This setting allows you to optimize the energy counter rollover for use with applications that support a limited number of significant
277. tions Ladder Diagram 0000 Source 7 qe Dest R6 0 LEN Ts Clear Dest R6 0 POS 6 lt 0001 1747 SDN 1747 SDN Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 Sample Applications C 23 TON 0002 Timer On Delay Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 Preset 75 lt Accum 55s SsQO 0003 Sequencer Output 15 File 110 0 1747 SDN Mask OFFFFh Dest N3 0 Control R6 0 Length 7z Position ai Dest M0 1 224 Length 6 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 24 0004 0005 0006 Sample Applications 1 1 PT Compute Dest M0 1 224 15 1747 SDN Pe Expression M1 1 224 AND 256 0004h Dest 25 lt Expression WN11 1 256 EQU OP Equal Copy File Source A N11 0 25 lt Source B 20 20 EQU Equal Source A N11 0 25 lt Source B 21 21 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 EQU Equal Source A Source B EQU Equal Source amp Source B EQU Equal Source A Source B EQU Equal Source A Source B Sample Applications C 25 N11 0 25 lt 22 22 N11 0 25 lt 23 23 N11 0 25 lt 24 24 N11 0 25 lt 26 26 lt Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 C 26 Sample Applications User Configured Data Table The final example is a ladder program designed to customize the User Setup Using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April
278. to 9999 integer 4 to 21 exponent defaults are 0 Readback Mode The data client uses the indexed read method to read harmonic analysis and individual harmonic data The options are e Auto increment 0 increments the channel after each read of Table A 34 This also controls the read back channel for individual harmonics results tables If you use the auto increment mode read any desired individual harmonic data for the current channel before the next read of Table A 34 e Manual increment 1 successive reads of Table A 34 will return harmonic results from the current channel As with other indexed reads DeviceNet and Ethernet optional communications support only manual increment read back mode so that the client must write a read back select message to change the channel returned in the results table For all other communications options auto increment read back mode will provide the highest communications throughput Reading Harmonic Analysis Data The Powermonitor 3000 presents harmonic analysis results in Table A 34 Harmonic Results THD Crest Factor and More This read only table contains 9 floating point elements in the M4 and M5 models and 10 floating point elements in the M6 and M8 models The table contains the following parameters Channel number the voltage or current channel being returned See above e IEEE THD Total harmonic distortion in per cent based on the IEEE definition Range 0 0 to 1000 0
279. to read or write using a Block Transfer instruction Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 18 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 e For optional DeviceNet and EtherNet IP communications a CIP Control and Information Protocol Assembly Instance identifies the data table Data Access Data tables may be read only or read write Number of Elements the number of unique data values contained in the table The number of words or bytes this represents depends on the data type Data Type Specified as floating point or integer Each floating point element consists of two 16 bit words or four 8 bit bytes of data Each integer element consists of one word or two bytes User configurability This attribute determines whether the user may configure the content and or length of the data table Let s look at the Date and Time table as an example e CSP file number N11 e Remote I O BT length 12 e CIP assembly instance 6 Write or 7 Read e Data table name Date amp Time e Data access Read write e Number of elements 8 e Data type Integer e User configurable No The Powermonitor 3000 data tables are listed in Appendix A Table A 1 in shows a summary of all the data tables Expressing Data in Data Tables The Powermonitor 3000 may express metering data in several formats in the communications data tables Floating point data type is used to express most metering results The trend lo
280. ts V 0 0 to 999 9x107 5 L2 N Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 6 3 N Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 7 Avg L N Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x10 8 L1 L2 Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 9 2 3 Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 10 L3 L1 Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 T1 Avg L L Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x10 12 Frequency last cycle Hertz Hz 40 0 to 75 0 Returns 0 or 999 0 if out of range 13 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Table A 10 Metering Sequence Voltage and Current Results Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables A 17 CSP File No Remote 1 0 BT 27 CIP Assy Inst 15 No of Elements 11 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Units Range Comment No 0 L4 Zero sequence Current Amps A 0 0 to 999 9x102 Refer to Symmetrical Component Analysis Results on page 3 5 1 Positive Sequence Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 2 Negative Sequence Current 0 0 to 999 9x102 3 Current unbalance PerCent 0 0 to 100 0 4 Positive Sequence Voltage Volts V 0 0 to 999 9x102 5 Negative Sequence Voltage 0 0 to 999 9x102 6 Voltage unbalance Per Cent 0 0 to 100 0 7 Phase rotation 0 to2 0 No rotation 1 ABC rotation 2 ACB rotation 8 Average frequency Hertz Hz 40 0 to 75 0 Average of the last 1 or 8 cycles Re
281. ts are selected by computing the ratio of the available short circuit current to the maximum fundamental demand load current The row of the table that corresponds to the ratio is then used to determine the proper limits for each of the individual harmonics and the TDD specified in the table columns IEEE 519 also recommends maximum voltage distortion levels that the utility should remain below Table 11 1 specifies these limits based on the magnitude of the line to line voltage at the PCC Once configured the 1404 M6 will automatically monitor the system voltage and current for IEEE 519 compliance Harmonic Magnitude The Powermonitor 3000 calculates the RMS magnitude of each individual harmonic Results are calculated for harmonics 1 to 41 M6 or 1 to 63 M8 for all 7 voltage and current channels Each result is expressed in RMS volts or amps Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 10 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Harmonic Distortion The Powermonitor 3000 calculates the magnitude of each individual harmonic with respect to the fundamental Results are calculated for harmonics 1 to 41 M6 or 1 to 63 M8 for all 7 voltage and current channels Each result is expressed as a percentage of the fundamental Configuring Harmonic Analysis You may configure harmonic analysis only via communications The Display Module does not support harmonic analysis configuration Configure harmonic analysis by p
282. turns 0 or 999 0 if out of range 9 Frequency source 0to2 0 V1 1 V2 2 V3 10 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 A 18 Powermonitor 3000 Data Tables Table A 11 Metering Power Results CSP File No F17 Remote 1 0 BT 31 CIP Assy Inst 16 No of Elements 13 User Configurable No Data Type Floating point Data Access Read only PM3000 Type All Element Element name Units Range Comment No 0 L1 Real Power Watts W 0 0 to 999 9x1022 Real power per phase signed to show direction 7 L Real Power EE Refer to Power Results on page 3 6 2 L3 Real Power 0 0 to 999 9x10 3 Total Real Power 0 0 to 999 9x1022 Total power signed to show direction 4 L1 Reactive Power Volt amps 0 0 to 999 9x1022 Reactive power per phase signed to show direction 5 L2 Reactive Power reactive 1022 VAR 0 0 to 999 9x10 6 L3 Reactive Power 0 0 to 999 9x1022 7 Total Reactive Power 0 0 to 999 9x1022 Total reactive power signed to show direction 8 L1 Apparent Power Volt amps 0 0 to 999 9x1922 Apparent power per phase 9 L2 Apparent Power ue 0 0 to 999 9x10 10 L3 Apparent Power 0 0 to 999 9x10 11 Total Apparent Power 0 0 to 999 9x1022 Total apparent power 12 Metering iteration 0 to 32767 Increments by 1 to 32767 rolls over to 0 Publicat
283. u may also configure no averaging for the fastest response to a changing signal Powermonitor 3000 Operations 3 5 Frequency Averaging like the RMS result averaging the default setting provides for a smoother response by averaging the frequency of each of the last 8 cycles You may select no averaging to return the frequency of only the last cycle Refer to Advanced Device Configuration on page 3 23 for more information Symmetrical Component Analysis Results The Powermonitor 3000 calculates sequence voltages and currents for use in symmetrical component analysis a method of mathematically transforming a set of unbalanced three phase vectors into three sets of balanced vectors The positive sequence components are a set of vectors that rotate the same direction as the original power vectors and represent that portion of the applied voltage or current capable of doing work Negative sequence components rotate opposite to the original vectors and represent the portion of the applied power that results in losses due to unbalance The percent Unbalance value is the ratio between the negative and positive current sequence in a 3 phase system and is the most accurate measurement of current unbalance because it takes into account the magnitude of the individual currents and the relative phase displacement The zero sequence component is a single vector that does not rotate and represents ground or neutral current or voltage
284. up to 64 concurrent Class 1 connections to instance 1 and one Class 1 connection to Instance 2 e ControlFLASH can be used to update ControlNet communication firmware e Supports ControlLogix message types CIP Generic PLC5 Typed e Set Powermonitor node address MAC ID via Display Module native comm port or ControlNet assembly instance 12 Figure 2 1 Master Module with Various Communications Options J Optional Remote 1 0 Port Powermonitor 3000 Removable Status Input Connector LED Indicators Display Module Port DIIIS Powermonitor 3000 NAP Port A a D o ControlNet Channel A ON ControlNet Channel B RS 485 Native Communications Port Series A Series B Auxiliary Powermonttor3 0 Port not El 6 3 used aN Optional Optional ptional Ethernet DeviceNet Ethernet g9 10BaseT Port 10BaseT 00 Port Port El m Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 10 Product Description LED Indicators Figure 2 2 LED Indicators Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 Olle ele
285. uration Summary Parameter Description Range Default User Setting RIO Rack Logical rack address 0 to 63 decimal 1 Address as configured in the scanner RIO Group Logical group number Q 1St quarter 0 1 quarter Number of quarter rack 9 ond quarter 4 3 quarter 6 4 quarter RIO Last Indicates 0 No 0 No Rack highest numbered 1 Yes logical rack group address PLC 2 based systems only RIO Baud Specifies the Remote 0 57 6 Kbaud 0 57 6 Kbaud Rate 1 0 communications 1 115 Kbaud rate 2 230 Kbaud Optional DeviceNet Communications Powermonitor 3000 units with a catalog number ending in DNT are equipped with an optional DeviceNet communication port in addition to the native port Both may operate at the same time You must configure the DeviceNet communications parameters before you connect the Powermonitor 3000 to a DeviceNet network Use the Display Module under the Program gt Optional Communications menu The DeviceNet configuration parameters include node address or MAC ID baud rate and bus off interrupt response Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 4 6 Communications Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 e Node address Range 0 to 64 default 63 e Baud Rate Range 125 250 or 500 Kbaud fixed rate AutoBaud or Program Baud Default 125 Kbaud fixed rate Bus off Interrupt Specifies the response to a CAN bus off interrupt Remotely settable node
286. us input 2 33 Any status input 5 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 5 8 Setpoint Programming and Operation Table 5 2 Setpoint Types Setpoint Type Description Units M4 M6 M8 M5 34 T Setpoint 1 time accumulator Seconds e fe fe 35 Setpoint 2 time accumulator e 36 Setpoint 3 time accumulator e e 37 Setpoint 4 time accumulator 38 Setpoint 5 time accumulator e 39 Setpoint 6 time accumulator 40 Setpoint 7 time accumulator 41 Setpoint 8 time accumulator 42 Setpoint 9 time accumulator e 43 Setpoint 10 time accumulator e e e 4 Voltage Sag 2 Volts e 45 Voltage Swell 2 46 Transient detected 2 47 Avg IEEE THD V e e 48 Avg IEEE THD e e 49 Avg IEC THD V e e 50 Avg IEC THD e e 51 Avg Crest Factor V e e 52 Avg Crest Factor e e 1 A setpoint activates when the magnitude of any phase passes the activation limit and releases when all phases pass the release limit in the appropriate direction for the setpoint evaluation condition 2 These setpoint types apply only to the applicable Powermonitor 3000 models and will appear as inactive on other models Table 5 3 Setpoint Action Type Setpoint Description M4 M6 M8 Setpoint
287. ut and environmental ratings D 4 input and output ratings D 4 measurement accuracy resolution and range D 3 relay life D 4 status input operations 6 5 counters 6 5 demand period synchronization 6 5 event logging of status inputs 6 6 setpoint inputs 6 5 system clock sample applications C 2 date and time summary C 16 EtherNet IP and ControlLogix C 7 PLC 5 controller using Remote 1 0 C 5 RSLinx DDE OPC and MicroSoft Excel C 11 SLC 500 controller and RS 485 communications C 2 T transient detection metering and capture 8 19 clear command 8 26 Index 3 configuration 8 20 reading capture data 8 22 reading metering data 8 21 U user configured data table setup using ControlLogix and EtherNet IP C 26 sample program operation C 26 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Cause
288. ute Typical values are 1 1 1 8 pu Figure 8 1 Sag and Swell Ev EEEn i2 E Center on Trigger Position Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 8 14 Advanced Features Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The pre defined setpoint configuration for the detection of sag and swell is based on the IEEE 1159 standard Although the default setpoint configuration is applicable as is for many sag and swell applications it may be necessary to alter the setpoint configuration to adjust the unit s sensitivity to sags and swells for your particular application Setpoint 19 is setup to detect voltage sag and has the following configuration data e Type Voltage Sag e Evaluation condition Under forward e High Limit 90 Nominal System Voltage e Low Limit 90 Nominal System Voltage e Action delay 0 e Release delay 0 e Output action Capture oscillograph Setpoint 20 is setup to detect voltage swell and has the following configuration data e Type Voltage Swell e Evaluation condition Over forward e High Limit 110 Nominal System Voltage e Low Limit 110 Nominal System Voltage e Action delay 0 e Release delay 0 e Output action Capture oscillograph Refer to Chapter 5 Setpoint Programming and Operation for more information on setpoints gt If the nominal system voltage setting is changed the high and low limits for setpoint 19 and 20 are automatically adjusted to 90 and 110 of
289. utes 4 17 expressing data in data tables 4 18 1 0 type communications 4 25 indexed reads of large data structures 4 23 simple reads of data tables 4 22 writing data to data tables 4 20 Index data messaging application considerations 4 25 DeviceNet 4 28 Ethernet 4 34 Remote 1 0 4 27 serial communications 4 25 user configured data tables 4 51 data messaging overview 4 16 data tables A 1 display module 2 3 display module functionality 3 12 displaying information 3 16 editing a parameter 3 17 issuing commands 3 18 key functions 3 12 power up 3 16 scrolling 3 17 setting a default screen 3 18 E event log 7 1 configuration options 7 2 configuring using communications 7 4 reading data using communications 7 5 user comment field for M8 7 6 viewing using the display module 7 2 F file data values C 20 frequently asked questions E 1 harmonic analysis 8 6 configuring 8 10 crest factor 8 7 harmonic distortion 8 10 harmonic magnitude 8 9 IEEE THD and DIN 8 7 IEEE 519 TDD and IEEE 519 pass fail 8 9 K factor 8 8 reading data 8 11 reading individual values 8 12 TIF 8 8 l 1 0 operations 6 1 Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 2 Index L led indicators 2 10 load factor 8 15 reading the log 8 17 master module 2 2 communications 2 2 configuration 2 2 metering accuracy class 3 3 metering functionality 3 1 configurable energy counter rollover 3 9 demand calculation 3 9 energy results 3 8 expressing me
290. way Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Br hlstra e 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 6356 9077 Fax 65 6356 9011 Publication 1404 UM001B EN P April 2003 PN 40055 213 01 3 Supersedes Publication 1404 UM001B EN P February 2003 Copyright 2003 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
291. ximum peak demand for current included in Min Max Log Demand Kilo Watts The calculated demand for real power 0 to 999 9x102 kW Max Demand Kilo Watts The maximum peak demand for real power included in Min Max Log Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 3 12 Powermonitor 3000 Operations Table 3 5 Energy and Demand Results Parameter Description Range Units Demand Kilo VARs The calculated demand for reactive power 0 to 999 9x102 kVAR Max Demand Kilo VARs The maximum peak demand for reactive power included in Min Max Log Demand Kilo VA The calculated demand for apparent power 0 to 999 9x102 kVA Max Demand Kilo VA The maximum peak demand for apparent power included in Min Max Log Projected Current Demand The projected demand for average current 0 to 999 9x102 Amps Projected Kilo Watt Demand The projected demand for real power 0 to 999 9x102 kWatts Projected Kilo VAR Demand The projected demand for reactive power 0 to 999 9x102 kVARs Projected Kilo VA Demand The projected demand for apparent power 0 to 999 9x102 kVA 1 Values returned depend on user selection of projected demand type in Advanced Configuration Display Module Functionality Publication 1404 UM001C EN P April 2003 The Display Module is a simple terminal that allows you to easily view metering parameters or change configuration items The Display Module uses three modes
292. ze resume de energizes the output during communications loss and resume output control when communication recovers e De energize freeze de energizes the output during communications loss and freezes the output de energized when communication recovers You may clear the freeze by placing the logic controller into program mode changing the behavior to last state resume or cycling power to the Powermonitor 3000 1 0 Operations 6 5 Status Input Operations The Powermonitor 3000 s two self powered status inputs provide a number of flexible configuration options that help customize the Powermonitor 3000 operation to meet the requirements of your specific application Counters You may use the Powermonitor 3000 to monitor discrete events such as circuit breaker status or kWh pulses from a legacy electrical energy steam gas or other type of meter Each status input has associated with it an independent counter which increments with every false to true transition of its input The counter rolls over to 0 when it reaches its maximum value of 29 999 The counter value may be read using the Display Module or communications to provide a value proportional to the accumulated value of the meter connected to the status input You may select the input counter values as Trend Log parameters You may clear either or both status input counters using the Display Module or by writing the appropriate command to the Advanced Device Configurat

1404-UM001C-EN-P, Bulletin 1404 Powermonitor 3000 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents